SPECIFICATIONS

Supply of material and Erection, testing and commissioning of New 11 kV lines for bifurcation of 25 nos overloaded feeders and Augmentation of 88 nos existing 11 kV feeders covered under Sirsa Circle on turnkey basis. VOLUME II

SECTION VII

BID NO. PD&C/TED 131/2010

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM HISAR

June-2010

Page 1 of 291

INDEX
VOLUME II SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

VII A, B & C

Technical Specifications

VII D

Drawings

Page 2 of 291

SECTION VII-A
1. Introduction The scope of this specification covers construction of new 11 KV lines for feeder bifurcation and augmentation of overloaded 11 kV feeders under Sirsa circle on supply-cum-erection (turnkey ) basis. 1.1 1.1.1 Scope : This specification covers detailed survey, spotting of location of poles, supply and erection of PCC poles in single pole support / double pole / 4 pole arrangement with complete 11 KV line material such as disc insulators with fittings, 11 KV Pin Insulators with Pins, V-Shape Cross arms, pole top bracket, straight X arms, earthing material, guy sets with complete material with nuts & bolts washers, pole clamps and all other required lines accessories and Belts & Bracings, ACSR Conductor, AB Cable, erected 11 KV lines etc. 1.1.2 This specification also includes the supply of the poles, insulators and their hardware, conductor, AB Cable, earth wire etc. The bidder shall clearly indicate in his offer the sources from where he proposes to procure the raw material / completed material and its components. 1.1.3 Any material not specifically mentioned in the contract but required to complete the job is deemed to be included in the scope of work of the Contractor. 1.1.4 The entire stringing work of the conductor,cable,messenger and earth wire shall be carried out by standard practice. The bidder shall indicate in his offer the detailed description of procedure to be deployed for stringing operation. 1.1.5 Location Details : The line shall be laid in the areas covered under DHBVN in Haryana. Earth wire, fixing of insulator strings, stringing of conductor and earth wire, fixing of stays and testing and commissioning of

1.2

Details of Line Route and Terrain :

Page 3 of 291

The 11 KV Power Lines, LT lines etc will be running almost through plain and cultivated area. Preliminary route alignment maps of Power lines covered under this package giving the general topography and major crossings like river, power lines, railway lines and roads are in the bidders scope. Wherever, special river crossings are involved proper strengthening of the normal pole locations will be done by the Contractor. 1.3 Access to the Line and Right of Way : Employer will facilitate and assist the contractor in getting clearance and securing way leave and right of way from private/public/Govt owned lands.However it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to conduct preliminary survey before quoting the Bid and further getting clearance for right of way during execution.The employer shall not be responsible for delay on this account or pay any compensation in lieu of getting clearance /any damages for right of way during execution of the project. 1.4 1.4.1 Detailed Survey of Optimization Pole Location : The detailed survey for the line route and optimization of the pole location along with profiling shall be carried out by the successful bidder. The provisional quantity has been indicated in the Bill of Material for each package. 1.4.2 (a) The tentative sketches of the lines / works to be carried out are available in the Office of the Nodal officer i.e. GM/Operation concerned from where the same can be obtained. The detailed survey shall be carried out by the bidder along the approved alignment. The bidder will examine the site of works and its surroundings and obtain himself, at his own responsibility and expenses, all information regarding general site characteristics, crossings accessibility, infrastructure details etc. The purchaser will, however, assist the interested bidder to see and inspect the site of work. For this purpose the bidders are requested to contact : General Manager, Planning & Design, DHBVN, Vidyut Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, Hisar or the respective DGM (Operation) / AGM(OP) of the area as indicated on sketch. Pole & 4 Pole Structure as per site requirements shall be provided where the situation so demands. Drawings of 2/4 Pole Structure is provided for guidance.

Page 4 of 291

(b)

Additional H Poles required for Pole Mounting Sub-Station under the existing 11 KV feeders are to be taken care of by the Bidder as per the requirement of Operation Organization.

1.4.3

The bidder should note that the Employer will not furnish the topographical map prepared by survey of India but will make available any assistance that may be required for obtaining topographical map.

1.4.4

Route Marking : At the starting point of the commencement of route survey the peg marking shall be done with iron spikes, driven firmly into the ground. A Benchmark on top section of the angle iron shall be made to indicate the location of the survey instrument. Teakwood peg shall be driven at prominent Position at intervals of not more than 750 meters along the Power line to be surveyed up to the next angle point. At angle position stone / concrete pillar with DHBVN marked on it shall be put firmly on the ground for easy identification.

1.4.5

Pole Locations : With the help of pole spotting data, pole locations shall be marked on the profiles prepared to check the required ground clearances. While locating the poles on the profile sheets the following shall be borne in the mind.

a) Extension: An individual span shall be as near to the normal design span as possible. In case an individual span becomes too short or long with normal supports on account of ground profile, one or both supports of the spans may be extended with standard design or provision of a special structure for the purpose according to technical specifications. The design of such extension shall be prepared & supplied by the Contractor and shall be got approved from the Employer. b) Road Crossings : At all the important road crossings, the protective cradle guarding will be provided and poles shall be fitted with normal tension insulators strings depending upon the location but the ground clearing at the roads at the maximum temperature and in the still air shall be such that even with the conductor broken at adjacent span, the ground clearance of the conductor from the road surface will
Page 5 of 291

not be less than 5.125 meter. For road and lines crossings 11 meter PCC poles (400 Kg.) shall be provided to achieve required clearances. H pole structure on 11 meter PCC poles for road crossings and single 11 meter PCC poles for line crossing shall be provided. c) Railway Crossings : The Contractor will make preliminary survey to assess the requirement of Railway Crossing and take the same into account in his Bid. The work of Railway Crossings will be got executed by him as a deposit work with the Railways or otherwise as per rules of Railway Department. The Employer will arrange to get the approval from Railway Authorities expedited. The case for approval will be submitted by the Contractor on the behalf of the Employer well in time. d) Power Line Crossings : Wherever the line is to cross over / below the other line of the same voltage or higher or low voltage the requisite clearances will be ensured in accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules. The Contractor shall submit and get approved from the Employer any special design where required in order to achieve such clearances. e) River Crossing: The route of 11 KV New / Augmented line/LT line if routed through a river bed / mullah or rivulet must have concrete foundation for erection of poles and must be supported by a good number of stay-supports capable to withstand water / wind pressure and must be executed to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. f) In case the 11 KV U/G cable is to be laid along the Municipal Road / High way, the Contractor will make preliminary survey to assess such requirement and take into account in his Bid. The employer will arrange to get the approval from the Civic Authorities. However, the case for approval will be submitted by the Contractor on behalf of the employer well in time. 1.4.6 Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees etc.: Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees and Telephone lines shall be provided in conformity with the Indian Electricity Rules 1956. 1.4.7 The tree cutting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at the time of survey as well as during actual execution. However, the Contractor shall count, mark and put proper Nos. with suitable quality of paint at his own cost on all the trees
Page 6 of 291

that are to be cut by him at the time of actual execution of work. Contractor may please be note that the Employer shall not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to the properties or for tree cutting necessitated due to Contractors work. 1.4.8 1.4.9 Any way leave which may be required by the Contractor shall be arranged by the Employer. To evaluate and tabulate the trees and bushes coming 6.096m on either side of the central alignment of the support, the trees will be numbered and marked with quality paint serially from angle point 1 onwards and corresponding number will be painted on the stem of trees at a height of 1m from ground level. The trees list should contain the following information: a) b) c) Girth (circumference) measured at a height of 1 m from ground level. Approximate height of the tree with an accuracy of +/- 2 mtrs. Name of the type of the species / tree.

1.4.10 The profile sheets duly spotted along with preliminary schedule indicating position of poles, wind span, weight span, angle of deviation, river or road crossings and other details shall be submitted for the approval of the Employer. After approval the, Contractor shall submit six more sets of approved reports along with one set of reproducible final profile drawings to the Employer for record purpose. 1.5 1.6.1 Environmental Conditions : General Climatic Conditions : The area is in extreme climatic belt. Monsoons are generally active in the area from the month of July to September. The area is also prone to mild dust storms during the months of March to May. The maximum temperature shall be of the order of 50C and minimum temperature shall be of the order of -2C. Normal every day temperature is 32C. 1.7 Technical Data: The bidder shall furnish all technical data as per relevant schedules in five copies. 1.8 1.8.1 Statutory Regulations and Standards : Statutory Regulations: The Contractor is required to follow Statutory Regulations stipulated in Electricity Act 1948 and Indian Electricity Rules 1956 as amended to-date and other local rules and regulations referred to in this specification. 1.8.2 Reference Standards :
Page 7 of 291

The work shall be carried out in accordance with specifications & construction standards attached hereto. The codes or standards referred to in this specification shall govern in all cases wherever such references are made. In case of conflict between such codes or standards and specification, latter shall govern. Such codes or standards referred to shall mean the latest revision, amendments / changes adopted and published by relevant agencies. specified shall also be accepted. 1.9 1.9.1 Other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equivalent or better performance than those All tested steel sections shall be supplied conforming to relevant Indian Standard Specifications. Quality Assurance, Inspection and Testing : Quality Assurance : The Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to control each activity. Such programme shall be outlined by the Contractor and shall be finally accepted by the Employer. 1.9.2 Quality Assurance Document : The Contractor shall be required to sub it all quality assurance documents as stipulated in quality plan at the time of Employers inspection of material. The Employer through his duly authorized representative reserves the right to carry out quality inspection / audit & checks to see the adequacy of the Contractors quality management programme. 1.9.3 Inspection and Testing : The Employer shall inspect the major material i.e. Poles, Conductors, Earth wire, Insulators, Pins, Hardware fittings at the works of supplier before dispatch. The requisite original type test certificates wherever required will be submitted by the Contractor / Supplier at the time of inspection for verification / examination by the Inspector. The material shall not be dispatched without dispatch authorization by the Employer. Other material shall be inspected by the Employer before erection at site. The Employer shall have the right to re-inspect at his expenses any material through previously inspection and approved by him at the Contractors / Suppliers works, before / after the same are erected at the site. If following the latter, the material is found defective, then the Contractor shall bear the cost of this inspection and re-instatement according to specifications. The Employer shall get the material inspected from his Engineers or from any other inspection agency at its discretion.
Page 8 of 291

2.0

Technical Parameters of 11 KV Line : Electrical System Data : a) b) c) d) 3. Nominal Voltage Maximum system voltage BIL (Impulse) Power frequency withstand voltage 11 KV 12 KV 75 KV (Peak) 28 KV

Details of line material for 11 KV Line(with ACSR):

3.1 Sr. No. 1 2

Particulars of Conductor: Particulars Type Standing and wire diameter in mm Conductor

ACSR 50 mm2 6/3.35(AI) 1/1.35(Steel)6/4.09(AI) 1/ 4.09 (steel) 3 Approximate Mass Kg. Per KM. 214/319 4 Approximate calculated breaking load KN 18.25/26.91 o 5 Calculated DC resistance at 20 C 0.5560 Ohm/0.3736 Ohm 6 Mass of Zine coating 190 gm.m2 7 Configuration of Conductor Triangular 3.2 Particular of Pin Insulator / Disc Insulators: Sr.No. Particulars I-Pole Str. H-Pole Str. 4-Pole Str. 1 No. of Disc Insulators 6 6 2 E&M Strength of each Disc 45 45 45 Insulator KN 3 11 KV Pin Insulator with Pins 3 3 6 4 E&M Strength of each Pin 10 10 10 Insulator KN 3.3 Material for Single / H-Pole/4 Pole Structure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PCC Pole 11 Mtr. V-Shape Cross Arm M.S.Channel X-Arm (100x50x62200mm) Pole Top Bracket Back Clamps 11 KV Pin Insulator with Pins 11 KV Disc Insulators Guy Sets with stay wire Earthing material as per design Nuts & Bolts, Pole Clamps MS Flat, 50x50x6mm, 2200mm for 4-Pole &1400mm for H-Pole MS Bracing 50x50x6mm, 3230mm 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 3 Nos. As required As required As per design 2 No. 1 No. As required 3 Nos. 6 Nos. 4 Nos. As required As per design 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 No. 5 Nos. As required 9 Nos. 6 Nos. 8 Nos. As required As per design 8 Nos.

Page 9 of 291

13 14 15 16 17 18

for 4-Pole &2860mm for H-Pole Tension fittings suitable for 50 sq.mm conductor P.G.Clamps for 50 sq.mm conductor Eye Screw bolts for earth wire M.S.Angle 50x50x6mm (2400mm) for earth wire. Danger Plate Number Plate

1 No.

6 Nos. 6 Nos. 1 No.

8 Nos. 6 Nos. 6 Nos 4 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 No.

3.4 3.5 4. 4.1

Tentative Bill of material for each Package is as per Schedule of Prices Vol-I. Meteorological Data is as per Annexure-II. Bolts , Nuts & Washers : All Bolts and Nuts shall conform to IS:1363-1967 (amended to-date) or equivalent to IES Standard. All Bolts and Nuts shall have Hexagonal head Nuts, the heads being forged out of the solid steel rods and shall be truly pen centric and square with the shank, which must be perfectly straight. Small Nuts & Bolts both shall be fully threaded whereas long bolts shall be partially threaded.

4.2

Steel Items :

All steel items shall be conform to IS:2062 Grade-A (amended to

date) or equivalent to IEC Standard. 5. 5.1 Spares and Clearances: Normal Span : The normal running span of the line shall be approx. 60 Mtrs. For 11 KV Line in the Cross Country. 5.2 Wind Span : The wind Span is the sum of two half spans adjacent to the support under consideration. For normal horizontal spans this equals to normal running span. 5.3 5.3.1 Electrical Clearances: Ground Clearances: The minimum ground clearances from the bottom conductor shall not be less than 5.125 meter at the maximum sag conditions i.e. at maximum temperature and still air. Any LT/HT/Telecommunication line falling around of new 11 KV line should have enough clearances as prescribed in I.E. rules applicable in this respect. 5.3.2 5.4 For river crossing, the minimum electrical clearance including ground clearance will be the same as for normal poles. Conductor and Earth Wire Configuration:
Page 10 of 291

The three phases shall be in triangular formation. The phase to phase spacing shall not be less than 1.070 Mtr. 6. 6.1 Drawings: The design and drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be approved/commented by the Employer as the case may be within 20 days of receipt of design/drawings in the office of the Engineer. If the design/drawings are commented by the Employer, the Contractor shall submit revised design/drawings within 15 days of date of issue of comments. The drawing will also be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer who will take further necessary action to approve the same or get it approved from the competent authority. 6.2 The Contractor is required to furnish the progress of submissions and approvals of design and drawings on 25th day of every month till the completion of all the design activities. 7. 7.1 Excavation & Erection of Poles: The Pits for the Poles are to be excavated in the direction of the line, as this will facilitate the erection of pole and given internal stability. The depth of the foundations to be excavated for the poles shall be approximately 1/6th of the Poles length. The alignment of the Poles are to be set right and the earth-filling will be done after checking the alignment vertically and earth will be rammed afterwards properly. 7.2 11 Poles are to be erected on almost 10th location when the line is going straight and it is also to be provided wherever there is an angle of deviation in the line. When the angle of deviation is 60C, 4 pole structure will be provided. In case of angle H-Pole, the pits are to be excavated along the bi-section of the angle of deviation. It will be ensured that the poles are held in vertical position and earth is filled in the pits and proper ramming is done so that pole remains in proper position. On every H-Pole, 4 stays are to be provided along the line i.e. 2 on each direction and in addition two more stays along the bi-section of the angle of deviation are to be provided as required depending upon the site conditions as per the drawings attached with the specifications. 7.3 The stays will be provided at all dead end locations, angle locations and T-Off points and also on normal locations as wind stays to counter the pressure of the winds. Normally every fourth pole of the line shall be provided with two wind
Page 11 of 291

stays one on either side of the pole. The angle of the stays will be generally kept on 30 to 45 degrees depending upon the tension and the location of the line. Every stay shall be provided with 11 KV Disc Insulators as per drawing. 7.4 Earthing shall be provided on every 4th pole as per the design attached hereto in addition to the continuous Earth Wire. H-pole structures will be provided with 2 No. earthings. 7.5 Number plate shall be provided on each location indicating the No. of Structure S1, S2 etc. 2 pole and 4 pole structures will be numbered both for structure Nos. as well as H-Pole /4-pole marking. For example if Ist H-pole appear at Structure No. 10, plate will be denoted as S-10/H-1. Similarly, if Ist 4-pole appear at structure No. 25, the same will be denoted by S-25/4P-1 & so on. 7.6 All unpainted /Un-galvanized iron sections like Channel, Angle/Clamps Stay sets etc. shall be given 2 coating of Red Oxide before installation to prevent rusting. To avoid rusting anti-corrosion aluminium paint shall also be provided. 7.7 One set of 11 KV lightning arrestor shall be provided within 3 KM area. 11 KV G.O. Switch shall be provided on the terminal structure near the grid S/Station & at the interconnection point with existing feeder to facilitate the complete isolation of the line. 8. 8.1 Handling of Conductor and Earth Wire: The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to the poles, insulators and conductors during transportation & stringing. While running out the conductors, care shall be taken that the conductors do not touch or rub against the ground or objects, which could cause scratches or damages to the strands. The conductors shall be run out of the drums from the top in order to avoid damage due to chaffing. 8.2 The stringing blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit the design of the X arms. Proper T&P shall also be made available to the Employer by the Contractor for checking the tensions in the guy wires. The drums shall be provided with a suitable braking device to avoid damages, loose running out and kinking of the conductor. The conductor shall be continuously observed for loose or broken strands or any other damage. When approaching end of a drum length atleast three coils shall be left when the stringing operations are to be stopped. These coils are to be removed carefully and if another length is required to be run, a joint shall be made as per the recommendations of the manufacturers.
Page 12 of 291

8.3

Repairs to Conductors if necessary shall be carried out during the running out operations with repair sleeves. Repairing of Conductors surface shall be done only in case of minor damage scuff marks etc. keeping in view both electrical and mechanical safe requirements. The final conductors shall be cleaned smooth and without any projections, sharp points cuts, abrasions.

8.4

Conductors Splices shall be made so that they do not crack or get damaged in the stringing operations. The Contractor shall use only such equipment/methods during Conductor stringing which ensures complete compliance in this regard.

8.5

Derricks shall be used where roads, rivers, channels, telecommunications or overhead power line, railway lines, fences or walls have to be crossed during stringing operations. It shall be seen that normal services are not interrupted or damage caused to property. Shut down shall be obtained when working at crossing of overhead power lines as per para 8.8. Contractor shall be responsible for proper handling of the Conductor. Earth wire and accessories in the field.

8.6

The sequence of stringing of Conductors/Earth wire shall be from top to downwards i.e. conductors will be run out in succession & earth wire will be strung in the last.

8.7

The proposed 11 KV power lines may run parallel for certain distance with the existing power lines, which may remain energized during the stringing period. As a result there is a possibility of dangerous voltage build up due to electromagnetic and electrostatic coupling in the pulling wire, conductors and earth wires which although comparatively small during normal operations can be severe during switching. It shall be Contractors responsibility to take adequate safely precautions to protect his employees and others from this potential danger.

8.8

The Contractor shall inform the Engineer whenever he wants to avail the Permit to Work from the local sub-division for erecting the new 11 KV line or augmenting the existing 11 KV line. A minimum 48 hours advance notice in writing for availing the shutdown on any live 11 KV feeder/LT lines shall be given to the Engineer. The 11 KV LT line on which permit is takenshould be made clear from all the temporary earth, men and material before cancellation of the Permit to Work. It is worth mentioning here that the Permit to Work on existing line shall be arranged through the Engineer or his representative and the same shall also be got cancelled through the same agency only./ No Permit to

Page 13 of 291

Work shall be issued on any line directly to Contractor or his staff from any 33 KV or 66 KV Sub-Station. 9. 9.1 9.1.1 Stringing of Conductor & Earth Wire: The stringing of conductor shall be done by standard stringing method. After being pulled the Conductor/Earth wire shall not be allowed to hang in the stringing blocks for more than 6 hours before being pulled to the specified sag. 9.1.1.1 Conductors creep in respect of ACSR 50 mm2/ 80mm2 Conductors are to be compensated by over tensioning the conductor at a temperature of 21C or lower during stringing. 9.1.2 The bidder shall give complete details of the stringing method, which he proposes to follow. Before the commencement of stringing the Contractor shall submit the stringing charts for the Conductor and Earth wire for various temperatures and spans along with equivalent spans to the Engineer for the approval of the Employer. 9.2 9.2.1 Sagging in Operation: The Conductor shall be pulled up to the desired sag and left in running blocks for atleast one hours after which the sag shall be re-checked and adjusted if necessary before transferring the Conductor from the running blocks to the pin insulators. The conductor shall be clamped within 36 hours of sagging. 9.2.2 The sag will be checked in the first and the last span of the section in case of sections upto 8 spans and in one intermediate span also for sections with more than eight Spans. The sag shall also be checked when the Conductor have been drawn up and transferred from running clocks to the insulators. 9.2.3 The running blocks when suspended from the structures for sagging shall be so adjusted that the Conductors on running blocks will be on the same height as a 11 KV Pin Insulators to which it is to be secured. At sharp vertical angle, the sag and tensions shall be checked on both sides of the angle, the conductor wire shall be checked from the running blocks for equality of tension on both sides. 9.2.4 9.3 Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in calm weather when rapid changes in temperature are not likely to occur. Tensioning and Sagging of Conductor and Earth Wire: The Tensioning and Sagging Operations shall be done in accordance with the approved stringing chart before the Conductor and Earth wire are finally attached
Page 14 of 291

to the poles through the earth wire clamps and insulators for the Conductor. The relevant stringing charts for the Conductor and earth wire should be employed for this purpose. 9.4 Final Checking, Testing and Commissioning: After completion of the works, final checking of the line and equipment shall be carried out by the Contractor to ensure that all the foundation works, pole erection and stringing has been done according to the specifications and as apaproved by the Employer. All the works shall be thoroughly inspected keeping in view the following main points: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) All the structures are straight & erect and in proper alignment. Sufficient back filed earth is lying over each pit and it is adequately rammed / compacted. All bolts are properly tightened and punched / tack welded. The stringing of the Conductors and Earth Wire has been done as per the approved sag and tension charts and desired clearances are clearly available. All Conductors and Earth wire accessories are properly installed & fixed. All other requirements to complete the work like fixing of danger plate, phase plate, number plate, barbed wire etc. are properly installed. The insulation of line as a whole is tested by the Contractor by providing his own equipment, labour etc. to the satisfaction of the Employer. The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning purpose. Earth resistance of every earth wire & P/M S/Stn. will be measured and result shall be supplied and same will also be checked by the Engineer or his representative. 10. 10.1 General Technical Conditions : The above provisions shall supplement all the detailed technical specifications and requirements brought out herein. The Contractors proposal shall be based on the use of materials complying fully with the requirements specified herein. 10.2 Engineering Data: the schedule as specified in the technical specifications. The review of these data by the Employer will cover only general conformance of the data to the specifications and not a thorough review of all dimensions quantities and details of the materials or items indicated or the accuracy of the information submitted. The review of the Employer shall not be considered by the Contractor as limiting
Page 15 of 291

10.2.1 Thefurnishing of engineering data by the Contractor shall be in accordance with

any of his responsibilities and liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the requirements specified under these specifications. 10.2.2 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after review by the Employer shall form part of contract document. If errors are discovered any time during the validity of the contract then the Contractor shall be responsible for their consequences. 10.2.3 The quantities worked out here are only tentative. The Contractor shall work out actual requirement and get it approved from the Engineer-in-Charge. payment shall be made on actual basis. I) In case of availability of space, in the Control Room, for the installation of only one 11 KV breaker panel & more than one feeder are to be emanated from the concerned sub-station, the 11 KV breaker panel incoming type shall be installed which shall cater to the requirement of one or more than one outdoor type VCBs (kiosk). The 11 KV HT supply shall be extended through 11 KV underground cable. II) ABack Filling of Pits : a) All the locations, (with following exceptions), the pits after erection of poles shall be back filled with excavated or borrowed earth in layers taking care to ram the earth in one layer at a time to the satisfaction of site-in-charge. b) For all the failure containment structures, described earlier & repeated below, the pits shall be hack filled with excavated / borrowed earth and broken bricks (Jhama) back properly rammed to the satisfaction of site-in-charge. i) ii) iii) iv) v) At some the tapping points & dead end poles At all the points where DT is to be installed. At all the points as per REC construction dwg. No. A-10 ( for the diversion angle of 10-60 degree). At the distance of 1 km max. from the last Jhama filled pole structure. Both side poles at all the crossing for main road, nallaha railway crossings etc.
Page 16 of 291

The

vi)

Al DP structures. Tapping points & roads where the failure containment structures is to be erected shall be decided during detailed engineering.

c)

The cost of backfilling including all material /borrowed earth/Jhama etc. is deemed to be included in the quoted price. The above clauses shall be read in conjunction with clause given below:

B-

Foundation & Pole Erection: a) i) ii) b) The foundation of poles shall be of the following types:Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated soil and brick batting for 200 Kg. PCC Poles. Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated/borrowed soil. The Type of foundation for individual poles shall be decided during detailed engineering. The bidder shall quote their rates as per the quantity of both types of foundations indicated in the BPS. The pole erection rate shall include excavation in all types of soil/rock, back-filling of the foundation pole as specified, cost of all materials, labour etc. c) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated soil and brickbatting for 200 Kg, PSC poles - The foundation pit of the pole should be of size 600 mm x 500 mm x depth. The base of the foundation shall be either of PCC (1:2:4) of size 400 x 400 x 70 mm or a stone plate of size 400 x 400 x 35 mm duly back-filled as explained in clause above. d) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated / borrowed soil and brick batting for 200 Kg. PSC Poles. The foundation pit of the pole should be of size 600 mm x 400 x depth. The base of the foundation shall be either of PCC (1:2:4) of size 400 x 400 x 70 mm or a stone plate of size 400 x 400 x 35 mm, duly back-filled as explained in clause above. e) It is envisaged that 11 KV line may be traversing marshy & low laying area for which special type of foundation shall be required.
Page 17 of 291

In such a case, difference in excavation quantity, concreting & reinforcement between special foundation and normal foundation shall be part of the package. f) Erection of Poles: The poles are to be erected in alignment with utmost care. The poles shall then be lifted to the pit with the help of wooden supports. The pole shall then be kept in the vertical position with the help of 25 mm (min.) manila ropes which shall act as the temporary anchor. The verticality of the pole shall be checked by spirit level in both longitudinal & transverse directions. Once, this is done, the back filling / concreting shall be done in the pit. The temporary anchor shall be removed only when poles set properly in the foundation. CErection of Stay Sets: The Contractor shall install the stay set complete in all respect. This includes excavation of pit size 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 1.6 m in all kinds of soil including laterite/hard rocks. Stay plate and rod (leaving the top 10 cm) shall be embedded in the pit with PCC in the ratio 1:2:4 (the volume of PCC shall be 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 0.8 m ). The rest (upper half) of the pit shall be filled with excavated soil duly compacted layer by layer. An angle between 30 to 45 degrees shall be maintained between stay wire and the pole. The stay wire shall be used with a stay insulator at a height of 5 m above ground level with G.I. turn buckle. Stay set shall be grouted as per drawing No. PGCIL/RE/Stay-Set.

Cl 11.0: 1. For the Drawings/GTPs/Standards which are not included in the above tender documents, latest REC standards are to be followed. 2. The technical specifications as given in the tender documents are covering a range of items, in that case only the material as per the schedule of prices is to be considered

Page 18 of 291

Page 19 of 291

SECTION VII- B

Page 20 of 291

Page 21 of 291

SECTION VII-B
1. 1.1 Drawings: All drawings submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the time of Bid shall be with sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, dimensions, material description, Bill of materials, weight of each component, break-u[p for packing and transportation, fixing arrangement required, the dimensions required for installation and any other information specifically requested in these specifications. Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name of the Employer, the specification title, the specification number and the name of the project. All titles, notings, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be to the scale and in metric units. The Contractor shall submit the necessary detailed route plan or other necessary construction drawings for approval to the Employer within 20 days of Letter of Intent. The route plan drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be examined by the Employer as far as practicable within 20 days and shall be modified by the Contractor, if any modifications and/or corrections are required by the Employer. The Contractor shall incorporate such modifications and/or corrections and submit the final drawings for approval.Any delays arising out of failure by the Contractor to rectify the drawings in good time shall not alter the contract completion date. 1.5 The drawings submitted for approval to the Employer shall be in quadruplicate. One print of suet drawings shall be returned to the Contractor by the Employer marked approved/approved with corrections . The Contractor shall thereupon furnish the Employer additional prints as may be required along with one reproducible in original of the drawings after incorporating all corrections. 1.6 The work shall be performed by the Contractor strictly in accordance with these drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the approval of the Employer, if so required. 1.7 All manufacturing, fabrication and erection work under the Scope of Contractor, prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractors risk. The Contractor may make any changes in the design which are necessary to conform to the provisions and intent of the Contract and such changes will again be subject to the approval by the Employer. 1.8 The approval of the documents and drawings by the Employer shall mean that the Employer is satisfied that: a) The Contractor has completed the part of the Works covered be the subject document (i.e., confirmation of progress of work). b) The work appears to comply with requirements of specifications. In no case the approval by the Employer of any document does imply compliance with all technical requirements, nor the absence of errors in such documents. 1.9 The following is the general list of the documents and drawings that are to be approved by the employer: a) Work Schedule (Master Network) Plan. b) Sag tensions calculation and sag template curve drawing. c) Pole spotting data.
Page 22 of 291

1.2

1.3 1.4

d) e) f) g) 1.10 1.10.1 1.10.2

1.11

1.12

2. 2.1

Detailed survey report and profile drawings showing ground clearance and pole locations. Pole earthing trawing. Pole accessories drawings like danger plate, number plate, phase plates etc. Pert Chart. Design Improvements : The Employer or the Contractor may propose changes in the specification and if the parties agree upon any such changes and the cost implication, the specification shall be modified accordingly. If any such agreement affects the price and schedule of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the price and schedule of completion before the Contractor proceeds with the change. Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been amended accordingly. Design Co-ordination. The contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate material/item to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the entire system. The basic design requirements are detailed out in this specification. The design of various components, sub-assembly and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance. Design Review Meetings The contractor will be called upon to attend design review meetings with the Employer and the consultants of the Employer during the period of contract. The Contractor shall attend such meetings at his own cost at Hisar or at mutually agreed venue as and when required. Such review meeting shall be held as & when required. Packing All the material shall be suitably protected, coated, covered of boxed and created to prevent or deterioration during transit, handling & storage at site till the time of erection. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. The contractor shall include and provide for securely protecting and packing the materials so as to avoid loss or damage during transport during transport by air, sea, rail and road. All packing shall allow for easy removal and checking at site. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for attaching slings for lifting shall be provided. All packages shall be clearly marked for with sign showing up & down on. Progress Report Appropriate visual charts shall accompany the monthly progress report detailed out the progress achieved on all erection activities as compared to the schedules. The report shall also indicate the reasons for variance between the scheduled and actual progress and the action proposed for corrective measures wherever necessary. Manpower Deployment Report
Page 23 of 291

2.2 2.3

3.

4.

4.1 4.2

4.3

The Contractor shall submit to the employer on the first day of every month a manpower deployment schedule for each activity. The Contractor shall also submit to the employer on the first day of every month a manpower deployment report of the previous month detailing the No. of persons scheduled to have been employed and actually employed. Tools, Tackle and Scaffolding The Contractor shall provide all the construction equipment, tools, tackle and scaffoldings required for construction, erection and commissioning of the power line covered under the contract. He shall submit a list of all such material of the employer before the commencement of work at site. These tools and tackle shall not be removed from the site without the written permission of the Employer.

4.4

First Aid and General Hygiene The Contractor shall provide necessary first aid & reasonable Hygiene facilities for all his employees, representatives and workmen working at the site Enough number of Contractors personnel shall be trained in administering the first aid.

4.5

Security The Contractor shall have total responsibility for all requirement and materials in his custody, stored, loose, semi-assembled and or erected by him at site. The Contractor shall make suitable security arrangements including employment of security personnel to ensure the protection of all materials, equipment and works from theft, pilferage and any other damages and loss.

4.6

Materials Handling and Storage:

4.6.1 All the supplies under the Contract as well as arriving at Site shall be promptly received, unloaded and transported and stored in the stores by the Contraction. 4.6.2 Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the employer immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc for the purpose of Employers information only. The Contactor shall submit to the Employer every week a report detailing all the receipts during the week. However, the Contactor shall be solely responsible for any shortage or damages in transit, handling and/ or in storage and erection at Site. 4.6.3 The Contractor shall maintain an accurate and exhaustive record detailing out the list of all items received by him for the purpose of erection and keep such record open for the inspection of the Employer. 4.6.4 Each package shall be legibly marked by the Contractor/ Supplier at his expenses showing the details such as description and quantity of contents, the name of the consignee and address, the
Page 24 of 291

5. 5.1

gross and net weight of the package, the name of the Contractor etc. Erection Conditions The following shall supplement the conditions already contained in the other parts of these specifications and documents and shall govern that portion of the work on this Contract to be performed at site. Regulation of local Authorities and Statutes

5.2

5.2.1 The Contractor shall comply with all the rules and regulations of local authorities during the performance of his field activities. He shall also comply with the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 and the payment of Wages Act (both of the Govt. of India) and the rules made there under in respect of any employee or workman employed or engaged by him or his Sub-Contractor. 5.2.2 All registration and statutory inspection fees, if any, in respect of his work pursuant to this Contract shall be to the account of the Contractor. However, any registration, statutory inspection fees lawfully payable under the provisions of the statutory law and its amendments from time to time during erection in respect of the 11 KV line, ultimately to be owned by the Employer, shall be to the account of the Employer. Should any such inspection or registration need to be re-arranged due to the fault of the Contractor or his SubContractor, the additional fees to such inspection and /or registration shall be borne by the Contractor. 5.3 Contractors Field Operation. 5.3.1 The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in advance regarding his field activity plans and schedules for carrying-out each part of the works. Any review of such plan or schedule or method of work by the Employer shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities towards the field activities. Such reviews shall also not be considered as an assumption of any risk by the Employer or any of his representatives and no claim of the Contractor will be entertained because of the failure or inefficiency of any such plan or schedule or method of work reviewed. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety, adequacy and efficiency of tools and plants and his erection methods. 5.3.2 All the materials stored in the open or dusty location must be covered with suitable weather-proof and flameproof covering material as applicable. 5.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities at various locations to store all items /materials which require indoor storage. 6. Construction Management Time is the essence of the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for performance of his works in accordance with the specified construction schedule. If at any time, the Contractor is
Page 25 of 291

falling behind the schedule for reasons attributable to him, he shall take necessary action to make good for such delays by increasing his work force or by working overtime or otherwise to accelerate the progress of the work and to comply with schedule and shall communicate such actions in writing to the Employer, satisfying that his action will compensate for the delay. The Contractor shall not be allowed any extra compensation for such action. 7. Field Office Records The Contractor shall set up his site offices at different locations to facilitate smooth working. The site offices shall be manned by his supervisors/ other staff. The Contractor shall maintain at his Site office up-to-date copies of all drawings, specifications and other supplementary data complete with all the latest revisions thereto. The Contractor shall also maintain, in addition, the continuous record of all changes to the above Contract Documents, drawings, specifications, supplementary data etc. effected in the field and on completion of his total assignment under the Contract shall incorporate data to indicate as installed conditions of the material supplied and erected under the contract. number of copies. 8. Protection of Property and Contractors Liability : The Contractor will ensure provision of necessary safety equipment such as barriers, sign-boards, warning lights and alarms etc. to provide adequate protection to persons and property. The Contractor shall be responsible to give reasonable notice to the Employers and the Owners of public or private property and utilities when such property and utilities are likely to get damaged or injured during the performance of his works and shall make all necessary arrangements with such owners, related to removal and/or replacement or protection of such property and utilities. 9. Insurance: The Contractor shall arrange & keep alive all the required insurance covers for his Employees/third parties as under :9.1 Workmens Compensation Insurance: Such drawings and engineering data shall be submitted to the Employer in required

Page 26 of 291

This insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims applicable under the Workmens Compensation Act, 1948 (Government of India). This policy shall also cover the Contractor against claims for injury, disability disease or death of his or his Sub-Contractors employees, which for any reason are not covered under the Workmens employees, which for any reason are not covered under the workmens Compensation Act, 1948. The liabilities shall not be less than: Workmens Compensation Employees Liability As per statutory Provisions As per statutory Provisions

9.2

Comprehensive Automobile Insurance This insurance shall be in such a form to protect the Contractor against all claims for injuries, disability, disease and death to members of public including the Employers men and damage to the property of others arising from the use of motor vehicles during on or off the site operations, irrespective of the ownership of such vehicles. The minimum liability covered shall be as herein indicated: Fatal Injury Property Damage : : : Rs. 100,000 each person Rs. 200,000 each occurrence Rs. 100,000 each occurrence

In case the employer is made to pay such compensation, the Contractor will be liable to reimburse the Employer such amount even in addition to the compensation indicated above. 9.3 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance injuries, disabilities, disease or death of members of public or damage to property of others, due to any act or omission on the part of the Contractor, its agents, its employees, its representatives and SubContractors or from riots, strikes and civil commotion. 9.3.2 The above are only illustrative list of insurance covers normally required and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain all necessary 9.3.1 The insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims arising from

Page 27 of 291

insurance coverage to the extent both in time and amount to take care of all its liabilities either direct of indirect, in pursuance of the Contact. 10. Protection of Measurements and Reference Points : The Contractor shall ensure that any finds such as relics, antiques, coins, fossils, etc. which he may come across during the course of performance of his works either during excavation or elsewhere, are properly protect3ed and handed over to the Employees. Similarly, the Contractor shall ensure that the bench marks, reference points etc. which are marked either with the help of Employer shall or by the Employer shall not be disturbed in any way during the performance of its works. If, any work , is to be performed which disturbs such reference, the same shall be done only after these are transferred to other suitable locations under the direction of the Employer. 11. 11.1 The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials and assistance to such relocation of reference points etc. Work and Safety Regulations: The Contractor shall ensure safety of all the workmen, materials plant and equipment belonging to him or to the others, working at the Site. The Contractor shall also provide for all safety notices and safety equipment required by the relevant legislations and deemed necessary by the Employer. 11.2 The Contractor will notify, well in advance to the Employer, its intention to bring to the site any Container filled with liquid or gaseous fuel or explosive or petroleum substance or such chemicals which may involve hazards. The employer shall have the right to prescribe the conditions, under which such a container is to be stored, handled and used during the performance of the works and the Contractor shall strictly adhere to and comply with such instructions. The Employer shall also have the right, at his sole discretion, to inspect any such container or such construction plant/equipment for which materials in the container is required to be used and dif in his opinion, its use is not safe, he may forbid its use. No Claim due to such prohibition or towards additional safety provisions called for by him shall be entertained by the Employer. Further, any such decision of the Employer shall not, in any way, absolve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Laws of land and in case use of such
Page 28 of 291

a Container or entry there of into the Site area is forbidden by the Employer, the Contractor shall use alternative methods with the approval of the Employer without any cost implication to the Employer or extension of work schedule. 11.3 Where it is necessary to provide and/or store petroleum products or petroleum mixtures and explosives, the Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out such provision and/or storage in accordance with the rules and regulations laid down in Petroleum Act, 1934, Explosives Act, 1948 or any other statuary acts in regard there of and amendments thereof, and petroleum and carbide of Calcium Manual published by the Chief Inspector of Explosives of India. All such storage shall have prior approval of the Employer. In case, any approval is necessary from the Chief Inspector (Explosives) or any statutory authorities, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the same. 11.4 All equipment used in construction and erection by Contractor shall meet Indian/International Standards land where such standards do not exist, the Contractor shall ensure these too be absolutely safe. All equipment shall be strictly operated and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with manufacturers operation manual and safety instructions and as per any existing Guidelines/rules in this regard. 11.5 Periodical examinations and all tests for all lifting/hoisting equipment and tackle shall be carried-out in accordance with the relevant provisions of Factories Act 1948. Indian Electricity Supply Act and associated Laws/Rules in force from time to time. A register of such examinations and tests shall be properly maintained by the Contractor and will be promptly produced as land when desired by Employer or by the persons authorized by him. 11.6 The Contractor shall provide suitable safety equipment of prescribed standard to all employees and workmen according to the need as may be directed by the Employer who will also have the right to examine these safety equipment to determine their suitability, reliability, acceptability and adaptability. 11.7 The Contractor employing more than 250 workman whether temporary, casual, probationer, regular or permanent or on contract, shall employ at

Page 29 of 291

least one full time officer exclusively as safety officer to supervises safety aspects of the equipment and workman. The name and address of such Safety Officer of the Contractor will be promptly informed in writing to the Employer with a copy to the Safety Officer-Incharge before he starts work or immediately after any change of the incumbent is made during currency of the Contract. 11.8 In case any accident occurs during the construction/erection or other associated activities undertaken by the Contractor, thereby causing any minor or major or total injury to his employees due to any reason whatsoever, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to promptly inform the same to the Employer and also to all the authorities envisaged under the applicable laws. 11.9 The Employer shall have the right to stop the work, if in its opinion the work is being carried out in such a way as may cause accidents and endanger the safety of the persons and /or property. In such cases, the Contractor shall be informed in writing about the nature of the hazards and possible injury /accident and he shall remove shortcomings promptly. The Contractor after stopping the specific work, can if felt necessary, appeal against the order of stoppage of work to the Employer within 3 days of such stoppage of work and the decision of the Employer in this respect shall be conclusive. 11.10 The Contractor shall not be entitled for any damages /compensation for stoppage of work due to safety reasons and the period of such stoppage of work will not be taken as an extension of time for completion of work and will not be the ground for waiver of any part of Contractors liability for timely completion of the works. 11.11 The Contractor shall follow and comply with all safety rules, relevant provisions of applicable laws pertaining to the safety of workman, employees plant and equipment as may be prescribed from time to time without any demur, protest or contest or reservation. In case of any conflict between statutory requirement and safety rules referred above, the most stringent clause shall be applicable. 11.12 If the Contractor fails in providing safe working environment as per Safety Rules or continues the work even after being instructed to stop work by
Page 30 of 291

the Employer, the Contractor shall promptly pay to the Employer on demand, compensation at the rate of Rs. 5000/- per day or part thereof till the instructions are complled with and so certified by the Employer. 11.13 If the Contractor does not take all safety precautions and /or fails to comply with the safety Rules as prescribed by the Employer or as prescribed under the applicable law for the safety of the equipment, plant and personnel and the Contractor does not prevent hazardous conditions which may cause injury to his own employees or employees of other Contractors, or Employer or any other person at site or adjacent thereto, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of compensation in the form of first hand relief as per the following schedule:a) Fatal Injury or accident causing death b) Major injuries or accident causing 25% or more Permanent disability : The contractor,however, shall be responsible for full amount of compensation admissible as per the law of land Permanent disability shall have the same meaning as indicated in Workmens Compensation Act. The compensation mentioned above shall be in addition to the compensation payable to the workmen/ employees under the relevant provisions of the Workmens Compensation Act and rules framed there under or any other applicable law as applicable from time to time. In case the Employer is made to pay any such compensation, the Contractor will be liable to reimburse the Employer such amount (s) even in addition to the compensation indicated above. 12. Code Requirements Rs. 20,000/per person Rs. 1,00,000/per person : : : : : Applicable for death/injury to any person whosoever

Page 31 of 291

The erection requirements and procedures to be followed during the execution of the project shall be in accordance with the applicable Indian / International standards /regulations, as indicated in Technical Specifications, good engineering practice, the Drawings and other applicable Indian codes, laws and regulations.

Page 32 of 291

SECTION VII-C Technical Specification of Equipments

Sr No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description PCC Poles 11M (400 kg WL) PCC Poles 9M (200 kg WL) ACSR 80 mm2 ACSR 50 mm2 Stay Wire 7/8 SWG(GSS) GI wire(GSL 8 SWG) MS Nuts and Bolts Porcelain insulators and insulators fittings for 11 kV overhead power lines GO switch 11 kV XLPE cable 185 mm2 Lightening Arrestor 9 kV Barbed wire 11 kV VCB O/G outdoor type 11 kV VCB O/G indoor type (on 33 kV S/Stn) 11 kV VCB O/G indoor type (on 132 kV S/Stn) 11 kV XLPE Aerial Bunched Cable Heat shrinkable termination kit for 11 kV Cables Control cable Heavy duty LA Feeder meter No.
CSC-XV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-VII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 HSD-S-658-ST-87 CSC-X/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-VI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC-XVI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

HSD/S-364/ST-163
CSC-XXIX/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

CSC-XXVIII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 CSC- 44 /DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

S-51/DD-121

S-76/DD-161
S-81/DD-116 S-143/DD-177 CSC-XXXVI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

CSC-45/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

Page 33 of 291

UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No. CSC-XV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-10

TECHNICAL SPECIFICTION
FOR PCC POLES (400 KG) W.L. (F.O.S.-2.5) 11 METER LONG.

Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

Page 34 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PCC POLES (F.O.S=2.5)11M LENGTH 1. SCOPE : This specification covers manufactures assembly testing at manufacturer works of PCC poles with an over all length of 11.00 M and working load of 400 kg at 0.6 M from the top (As per drawings attached) suitable for use in over head 33 kV & 11 kV lines as per schedule of requirement. 2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS : Except when they conflict with specific requirement in the specification , the poles shall comply with the relevant provisions made in the following Indian standards specification with the latest version there of . a) IS : 1678-1978 Specification for priestessed concrete pole for overhead power telecommunication lines b) IS: 2905-1966 Methods of test for concrete pole for overhead power, traction telecommunication lines. c) IS: 7321-1974 code of practice for selection, handling and erection of concrete poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines. d) IS: 1343-1980 code of practice for pre-stressed concrete. e) IS: 456-1978 code of practice for plain & reinforced concrete. f) IS: 1785 (Latest edition) for H.T. steel wires for pre-stressed concrete. 3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The PCC poles are required to be used under the following site conditions :1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Max ambient temperature Min. ambient temperature Max. relative humidity Min. relative humidity Average number of rainy days per annum. Average number of dust storm days per annum. Isoceraunic level Average number of dust storm days per annum. Max. wind pressure 50c -2.5 c 100% 26% Nearly 120 days 900 mm 45 35 195 kg/m 1000 meter

10. Altitude above mean sea level less than 4.

TERMINOLOGY: For the purpose of is standard, the following definitions shall apply.
Page 35 of 291

4.1 4.2 4.3

AVERAGE PERMANENT LOAD: That fraction of the working load which LOAD FACTOR: TRANSVERSE: The ratio of ultimate transverse load to the transverse The direction of the line bisecting the angle contained

may be considered of long duration over a period of one year. load at first crack. by the conductor at the pole. In the case of straight run, this will be normal to the run of the line. 4.4 4.5 TRANSVERSE LOAD AT FIRST CRACK: For design, the transverse load at first crack shall be taken as not less than the value of the working load. WORKING LOAD: The maximum load in the transverse direction, that is ever likely to occur, including the wind pressure on the pole. This load is assured to act at a point 600 mm below the top with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth, as intended in the design. 4.6 ULTIMATE FAILURI: The conditions existing when the pole ceases to sustain a load increment owing to either crush of concrete, or snapping of the prestressing tendon or permanent stretching of the steel in any part of the pole. 4.7 ULTIMATE TRANSVERSE LOAD: The load at which failure occurs, when it is applied at a point 600 mm below the top and perpendicular to the axis of the pole alongwith the transverse direction with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth as appended in the design. 5. MATERIALS : 5.1 CEMENT: The cement used in the manufacture of pre-stressed concrete poles shall be ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS: 269-1976 (specifications of ordinary and low heat Portland cement) or IS-804 IE1978 (specifications for rapid hardening Portland cement). 5.2 AGGREGATES: Aggregates used for the manufacture of pre-stressed concrete poles shall conform to IS: 383-1970 (Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete). The nominal max. size of aggregates shall in no case exceed 10 mm. 5.3 5.4 WATER: Water should be free from chlorides, sulphate other salts and ADMIXTURE: Admixtures should not contain calcium chloride or other organic matter portable water shall be generally suitable. chlorides and salts which are likely to procorrosion of pre-stressing steel.

Page 36 of 291

5.5

PRE STRESSING STEEL : The pre-stressing steel wires, including those

used as untensioned wires, should conform to IS ;1985 (part-1)- 1966 (specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for pre-stressed concrete part-1 cold drawn stress relieved wire), IS :1785 (part-II ) -1967 (specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete part-II as drawn wire), or IS :6003-1970 (specification for intended wire for prestressed concrete )or the latest version thereof. 5.6 The concrete Mix. Shall be designed to the requirement laid down for controlled concrete (also called design mix. Concrete) in IS :1343-1980(code of practice for plain & reinforced concrete) subject to the following special conditions :A) Minimum works cube strength at 28 days should be at least 400kg/cm2 . B) The concrete strength at transfer should be at least 200kg/cm2 . C) The mix. Should contain at least 380kg of cement per cubic meter or concrete. D) The Mix should contain as low a water content as is consistent with adequate workability, if it become necessary to add water to increase the workability. If it becomes necessary to add water to increase the workability, the cement content also should be raised in such a way that the original value of water cement ratio is maintained. 6. WELDING AND LAPPING OF STEEL: The high tensile steel wire shall be continuous over the entire length and the tendon welding shall not be allowed in any case. However, jointing or coupling be permitting provided the strength of the joint or coupling is not less than the strength of each individual wire. 7. MANUFACTURE 7.1 All prestressing wires and re-enforcements shall be accurately fixed as shown in the drawings and maintained in position during manufacture. The unmentioned re-informants, as indicated in the drawing, should be held in position by use of stirrups which should go round all the wires. 7.2 All wires shall be accurately stretched with uniform prestress in each wire. Each wire or group of wires shall be anchored positively during casting care shall be taken to see that the anchorages do not yield before the concrete attains necessary strength.

Page 37 of 291

7.3 7.4

COVERS ; The cover concrete measured from the outside of the COMPACTING Concrete shall be compacted by spinning , vibrating

prestressing tendon shall be normally 22mm. shocking or other suitable mechanical means. Hand compaction shall not be permitted. 7.5 CURING :The concrete shall be covered with a layer of socking canvas, Hessian or similar absorbent material and kept constantly wet up to the time when the strength or concrete at least equal to the minimum strength of concrete at transfer of pros tress . Thereafter, the pole may be removed from the mould and watered at intervals to prevent surface cracking of the unit, the interval should depend on the atmospheric humidity temperature. 7.6 The prestressing wires shall be detensioned only when the concrete has attained the specified strength all transfer (i.e. 200kg/cm2). The cubes cast for the purpose of determining the strength at transfer should be cured, as for as possible, under conditions similar to those under which the poles are cured. The transfer stage shall be determined based on the daily tests carried out on concrete cubes till the specified daily tests carried out on concrete cubes till the concrete strength indicated above is reached. thereafter the test on concrete shall be carried out as detailed in IS-1343-1980(code of practice for prestressed concrete )The manufacturer shall supply, when required by the purchaser or his representative , results of compressive test conducted in accordance with IS:4561978(code of practice for plain and re-inforced concrete) on concrete cubes made from the concrete used for the poles . if the purchaser so desire manufacturer shall supply cubes for test purposes &such cubes shall be tested in accordance with IS :456-1978 (code of practice for plain & reinforced concrete). The detensioning shall be done by slowly releasing the wires , without imparting shock or sudden load to the poles. The rate of detensioning may be controlled by any suitable mean either mechanical (screw type) or hydraulic. The poles shall not be detensioned or released by cutting the pre-stressing wires using flames or bar coppers while the wires are still under tension. 8. EARTHING: Earthing shall be provided by having a length of 8 SWG GI wire embedded in concrete during manufacture and the ends of the wires left projecting from the pole to a length of 175mm at 250mm from top and 450mm below ground level.
Page 38 of 291

The earth wire shall not be allowed to come in contact with the prestressing wires. 9. HANDLING ; Separate eye hooks shall be provided for handling and transport one each at a distance of 165cms from either end of pole and they should be on the face that has the shorter dimension of the cross section. 10. TESTS : 10.1 Transverse strength test : Pole made from ordinary Portland cement shall be tested only on the 10.1.1.

completion of 28 days and poles made form rapid hardening cement only on the completion of 14 days after the date of manufacture. 10.1.2. The pole may be tested in either horizontal or vertical position. If tested in horizontal position, provisions shall be made to compensate for the overhanging weight of the pole for this purpose the over hanging portion of the pole may be supported on a movable trolley or similar device. 10.1.3. 10.1.4. The pole shall be rigidly supported at the butt and for a distance equal Load shall be applied at a point 600mm from the toe of the pole and to the agreed depth of planting i.e. 1.80 M. shall be steadily and gradually increased to the design value of the transfer load at first crack. The deformation at this load shall be measured. A prestressed concrete pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test of visible cracks appear at a stage prior to the application of the design transfer load for the first crack. The load shall then be reduced to zero and increased gradually to a load equal to the first crack load plus 10%of the minimum ultimate transverse load, and held up for 2 minutes. This procedure shall be repeated until the load reaches the value of 80 percent of the minimum ultimate transverse load and thereafter increased by 5 percent of the minimum ultimate transverse load until failure occurs. Each time of the load is supplied it shall be held for 2 minutes. The load applied to prestressed concrete pole at the point of failure shall be measured to the nearest five kilograms . concrete pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the observed ultimate transverse load is less than the design ultimate transverse load. 10.2 MEASUREMENT OF COVER :-After completion of the transverse strength test, the sample pole shall be taken and checked for cover . The cover
Page 39 of 291

of the pole shall be measured at 3 points, one within 1.8 meter from the butt end of the pole , the second within 0.6meter from the top and the third at an intermediate point and the mean value compared with the specified value . The mean value of the measured cover should not differ by more than the 1mm from the specified cover. The individual values should not differ by more than 3mm from the specified value. If these requirements are not met the workmanship with reference to aligning of the end plates and pre-stressing and assembly of moulds should be improved and inspection at production stage tightened suitably. 11. INSPECTION : Inspection of material and supervision of tests in accordance with the relevant Indian standards mentioned in clause-2 above and supporting drawing and schedules and approved manufacture specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or duly authorized representative. The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality . The manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specifications/drawings. The purchaser has the right to have tests carried out at the cost of supplier by and independent Govt. agency where ever there is dispute regarding the quality of material supplied. 12. MARKING ; The pole shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the following particulars either during or after manufacture but before testing at a position so as to be easily read after erection in position. A) B) C) D) Month and year of manufacture Transfer strength of pole in kg. Maker s serial no. and mark UHBVN/DHBVN PO No. & Dt.

Page 40 of 291

ANNEXURE - A SCHUDULE OF GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 METER PCC POLES. Sr. No. Particulars 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Overall length of pole (mtrs). Working load at 0.6 Mtr. From top(kg) Factor of safety Bottom depth cm) Top depth(cm) Breadth (cms.) No. tensioned wires per pole(Nos.) No. of untensioned wires per pole( Nos.) Length of each untensioned wire Concrete QTY(m3/pole) Steel Qty (kg/pole). Weight of complete pole (kg). Value

Page 41 of 291

UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No. CSC-VII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PCC POLES (200KG) W.L. (F.O.S-2.5) 8/9 METER LONG

Issue of the Month: JUNE-2009

Common Specifications

Page 42 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PCC POLES (200KG) W.L. (F/O/S-2.5) 8/9 METER LONG.

Page 43 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PCC POLES (F.O.S-2.5) 8M AND 9M LENGTH

1. SCOPE: This specification covers manufacture, assembly, testing and inspection before dispatch at manufacturers works of PCC poles with an overall length of 8 M and 9 M and working load of 200Kg at 0.6 M from the top suitable for use in overhead LT & HT lines. 2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS: Except when they conflict with requirement in this specification, the poles shall comply with relevant provisions made in the following Indian Standards Specification. 2.1. IS - 1678/1960/1978 Specification for prestressed concrete poles for overhead power, traction and telecommunication lines. 2.2. IS - 2905/1966 Methods of test for concrete poles for over head power and telecommunication lines. 2.3. IS 7321/1974 Code of practice for selection, handling and erection of concrete poles for over head power and telecommunication lines. 3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The PCC poles are required to be used under the following site conditions 3.1. Max. Temp. 3.2. Min. Temp. 3.3. Max. relative humidity 3.4. Average no. of rainy days per annum. 3.5. Min. relative humidity 3.6. Average annual rainfall 3.7. Isoceraunic level 3.8. Max. wind pressure 3.9. Average no. of dust storm days per annum. 3.10.Altitude above mean sea Level less than. 500C -2.50C 100% 120 days 26% 900mm 45 195Kg./Mtr2 35 1000Mtrs.

Page 44 of 291

4. TERMINOLOGY: For the purpose of this standard the following definition shall apply. 4.1. AVERAGE PERMANENT LOAD; That fraction of the working load which may be considered of long duration over period of one year. 4.2. LOAD FACTOR: The ratio of ultimate transverse load to the transverse load at first crack. 4.3. TRANSVERSE: The direction of the lines bisecting the angle contained by the conductor at the pole. In the case of straight run this will be normal to the run of the pole. 4.4. TRANSVERSE LOAD AT FIRST CRADK: For design, the transverse load at first crack shall be taken as not less than the value of the working load. 4.5. WORKING LOAD: The maximum load in the transverse direction, that is ever likely to occur, including the wind pressure on the pole. This load is assumed to act at a point 600 mm below the top with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth as intended in the design. 4.6. ULTIMATE FAILURE: The conditions existing when the pole ceases to sustain a load increment owing to either crushing of concrete, or snapping of the prestressing tendon of permanent stretching of the steel in any part of the pole. 4.7. ULTIMATE TRANSVERSE LOAD: The load at which failure occurs, when it is applied at a point 600 mm below the top and perpendicular to the axis of the pole along with the transverse direction with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth. 5. MATERIALS: 5.1. CEMENT: The cement used in the manufacture of prestressed concrete poles shall be ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS: 269/1978 (specifications for ordinary and low heat Portland cement) or IS: 8041/1976/1978 (specifications for rapid hardening Portland cement).
Page 45 of 291

5.2. AGGREGATES: Aggregates used for the manufacture of prestressed concrete shall conform to IS: 383/1970 (specifications for coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for concrete). The nominal max. size of aggregate shall in no case exceed 10mm. 5.3. WATER: Water should be free from chlorides, sulphates, other salts and organic matter. Potable water will be generally suitable. 5.4. ADMIXTURES: Admixtures should not contain calcium chloride or other chlorides and salts which are likely to promote corrosion of prestressing steel. 5.5. PRESTRESSING STEEL: The prestressing steel wires, including those used as untensioned wires, should conform to IS: 1785/Part-1 /1966 (specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete part-1 cold drawn stress relieved wires (IS: 1785/Part-II) 1967 (specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete Part-II As drawn wire) or IS: 6003/1970 (specification for indented wire for prestressed concrete).

5.6. CONCRETE MIX. : The concrete mix shall be designed to the requirements laid down for controlled concrete (also called design mix concrete) in IS: 1343/1960 (code of practice for prestressed concrete) and IS: 456/1964 (code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete) subject to the following special conditions. a. Min. works cube strength at 28 days should be at least 420 Kg./Sq. cm.

Page 46 of 291

b. The concrete strength at transfer should be at least 210 Kg./Sq. cm. c. The mix should contain at least 380 kg of cement per cubic meter of concrete. d. The mix should contain as low a water content as is consistent with adequate workability if it becomes necessary to add water to increase the workability, the cement content also should be raised in such a way that the original value of water cement ratio is maintained. 6. WELDING & LAPPING OF STEEL: The high tensile steel wire shall be continuous over the entire length of the pole tendon. Welding shall not be allowed in any case, however, jointing or coupling may be permitted provided the strength of the joints or coupling is not less than the strength of each individual wire. 7. MANUFACTURE: 7.1. All prestressing wires and reinforcements shall be accurately fixed as shown in the drawings and maintained in position during manufacture. The untensioned re-inforcement as indicated in the drawing should be held in position by the use of strips which should go around all the wires. 7.2. All wires shall be accurately stretched with uniform prestress in each wire. Each wire or group of wires shall be anchored positively during casting. Care shall be taken to see that the anchorages do not yield before the concrete attains the necessary strength. 7.3. COVER: The cover concrete measured from the outside of the prestessing tendon shall be normally 20mm. 7.4. COMPACTING: The concrete shall be compacted by spinning, vibrating shocking or other suitable mechanical means. Hand compaction shall not be permitted. 7.5. CURING: The concrete shall be covered with a layer of sacking, canvas, Hessian or similar absorbent material and kept constantly wet up to the time when
Page 47 of 291

the strength of concrete is at least equal to the minimum strength of concrete at transfer of prestress. Thereafter, the pole may be removed from the mould and watered at intervals to prevent surface cracking of the unit. The interval should depend on the atmospheric humidity and temperature. 7.6. The prestressing wires shall be detensioned only after the concrete has attained the specified strength at transfer i.e. 210 kg/Sq. Cm. The cubes cast for the purpose of determining the strength at transfer should be cured as far as possible under conditions similar to those under which the poles are cured. The transfer stage shall be determined based on the daily tests carried out on concrete cubes till the specified strength indicated above is reached. Thereafter the test on concrete shall be carried out as detailed in IS: 1343/1960 (code of practice for prestresssed concrete). The manufacturer shall supply when required by the purchaser or is representative, results of compressive test conducted in accordance with IS: 456/1964 (code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete) on concrete cubes made from the concrete used for the poles. If the purchaser so desires, the manufacturer shall supply cubes for test purposes and such cubes shall be tested in accordance with IS: 456/1964/1978. (Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete). The detensioning shall be done by slowly leasing the wires without imparting shock or sudden load to the poles. The rate of detensioning may be controlled by any suitable means either mechanical (screw type) or hydraulic. The poles shall not be detensioned or released by cutting the prestressing wires using flames or bar choppers while the wires are still under tension. 8. EARTHING: Earthing shall be provided, a. By having length of 8 SWG, GI wire embedded in concrete during manufacture and the ends of the wires, left projecting from the pole to a length of 175mm, at 250 mm from top and 150mm below ground level.

Page 48 of 291

b. By providing two holes of suitable dimensions 250mm from top and 150mm below ground level to enable the GI wires to be taken from the top hole to the bottom hole through central hollow. The earth wire shall not be allowed to come in contact with the prestressing wires. 9. TESTS: 9.1. TRANSVERSE STRENGTH TEST: 9.1.1. Poles made from ordinary port land cement shall be tested only on the completion of 18 days and poles made from rapid hardening cement only on the completion of 14 days after the day of manufacture. 9.1.2. The Pole may be tested in either horizontal or vertical position. If tested in horizontal position, provision shall be made to compensate for the overhanging weight of the pole. For this purpose the overhanging portion of the pole may be supported on movable trolley or similar device. 9.1.3. 9.1.4. The pole shall be rigidly supported at the butt end at a distance equal to the agreed depth of planting i.e. 1.5M. Load shall be applied at a point 600mm from the top of the pole and shall be steadily and gradually increased to the design value of the transverse load at the first crack. The deflection at this load shall be measured. A prestressed concrete pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if visible cracks appear at a stage prior to the application of the designed transverse load for the first crack. The load shall then be reduced to zero and increased gradually to a load equal to the first crack load plus 10% of the minimum ultimate transverse load and help up for two minutes. This procedure shall be repeated until the load reaches the value of 80% of the minimum ultimate transverse load and thereafter load until failure occurs. Each time the load is applied, it shall be hold for two minutes. The load applied to prestressed concrete pole at the point of failure shall be measured to nearest five kgs.
Page 49 of 291

The poles shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the observed ultimate transverse load is less than the designed ultimate transverse load. 9.2. MEASURMENT OF COVER: After completion of the transverse strength test the sample pole shall be taken and checked for cover. The cover of the pole shall be measured at three points one within 1.8M from the butt end of the pole, the second within 0.6 meter from the top and the third at an intermediate point and the mean value compared with specified value. The mean value of the measured cover should not differ by more than 1 mm from the specified cover. The individual values should not differ by more than 3 mm from the specified value. If these requirements are not met, the workmanship with reference to aligning of the end plates and prestressing wire and assembly of moulds should be improved and inspection production stage tightened suitably.

10. INSPECTION: Inspection of material and supervision of tests in accordance with the relevant ISS as mentioned in column 2 above, supporting drawing, schedule and approved manufacturers specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or duly authorized representative. The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The Nigam reserves the right to inspect the material and the process at any time and the manufacturer shall provide to the inspection officer necessary access and facility without charge to satisfy him that the material is being manufactured in accordance with the specifications. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable time to manufacturers work to inspect and witness the test of the material manufactured.

Page 50 of 291

The purchaser has the right to have the tests carries out at the cost of supplier by and independent Govt. agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of material supplied. In order to ensure that the poles are manufactured strictly in accordance with the above specification, the supplier shall also intimate to the Nigam from time to time, its time table to the manufacture of the poles and actual date of commencement of manufacture of each lot so that the inspecting officer can be deputed to check the following during the course of manufacture of poles. a. Tensile strength of steel wire. b. Release of stress from the steel wires after 5-8 days depending upon the quality of cement and curing. c. Method of curing. d. Quality of aggregate concrete and cement. e. Water cements ratio and mixing lines. f. Cube mould testing from concrete mixture to ensure that honeycombing is not present in the mixture. g. Cube mould testing from concrete being used. h. Use of proper type of vibrators. The Nigams authorized representative will supervise the manufacturing of the poles at various stages to ensure that the some are being manufactured in accordance with approved specification and drawings. 11. STACKING: The supplier shall stack the poles in such a way that it is possible for the inspecting officer to select and inspect the poles, as he may choose to inspect. All such facilities for taking out the selected poles will be extended by the supplier free of charge. 12. MARKING: The poles shall be clearly & indelibly marked with the following particulars during manufacture before testing at a position so as to be easily read after erection position. a. Date, month and year of manufacture. b. Working load of pole in Kg. c. Makers serial no. or mark.

Page 51 of 291

UHBVN/DHBVN and planting depth will hence forth be embossed on each pole. Firms will give month wise schedule of manufacture against PO to facilitate inspection during manufacture process. Whenever poles are tested out of any lot lying in Nigam stores, cost of the poles and testing charges will be charged to stock storage. Checking of cover over steel. Out of every 500 poles, one may be taken for ultimate strength testing, cover checking after crushing and checking of un-tensioned/ tensioned wire.

SDHDULE GUARANTED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PCC POLES (TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE TENDERER) 1. Overall length of pole. 2. Working load at 0.6M from top 3. Factor of safety 4. Top Depth 5. Bottom Depth 6. Breadth 7. Nos. of tensioned wires per pole 8. Nos. of untentioned wires per pole 9. Length of each untensioned wire 10. Concrete quantity 11. Steel quantity 12. Cement quantity cm. cm. cm. Nos. Nos. M Meter cubic /Pole kg/Pole kg/Pole M kg

Page 52 of 291

Technical Specification for Hard-Drawn Stranded Steel Cored Aluminium Conductor for 33 KV Power Transmission Lines.

Page 53 of 291

Technical Specification for Hard-Drawn Stranded Steel Cored Aluminium Conductor for 33 KV Power Transmission Lines.
1. Scope: This specification covers the details of the conductors for the use on 33 KV Overhead Power Transmission Lines. 2. Applicable Standards: Except when they conflict with the specific requirements in this specification, the conductors shall comply in all respect with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 398/Part-II-1976 and 4826-1976 or the latest version thereof. The conductor shall be ISI marked.
3. Material:

The conductor shall be made from the hard drawn aluminium and galvanized steel wires having mechanical and electrical properties as per clause 4, 5 & 6. The aluminium and galvanized steel wires shall have physical constants conforming to clause 3 & 4 respectively of IS: 398/PartII-1976 or latest version thereof. The hot dipped or electrolytic process galvanized coating on steel wires may be applied. The uniformity of galvanizing and weight of coating shall be in accordance with IS : 48261976 or latest version thereof. 4. Sizes: The sizes and properties of standard steel-cored aluminium conductors shall be as under: -

Table-I
Stranded Aluminium Conductors, Galvanized Steel Reinforced Nomin Stranding Section Total Approx. Approx wire al area section Overall . Mass al Al. and diameter area of Al. al area Diamete r Al. Steel 1 mm2 80 100
4.

2 3 mm mm 6/4.09 1/ 4.09 6/4.72 7/1.57

4 mm2 78.83 105

5 mm2 91.97 118.5

6 Mm 12.27 14.15

7 Kg/Km 319 394

Calculat ed Resistan ce at 0 20 C max. 8 Ohm/Km 0.3736 0.2810

Approx. calculat ed breaking load 9 KN 26.91 32.41

Aluminium Wires:

Page 54 of 291

The properties of aluminium wires to be used in the construction of the stranded wires shall be as under: ALUMINIUM WIRES USED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF STRANDED, ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS, GALVANISED STEEL REINFORCED. TABLE-II Cross Mass Resista Breaking Load Diameter nce at before Min. Nomin Min Max sectional area of 200C stranding after al . . nominal max. strandin diameter g wire. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 mm mm mm mm2 Kg/Km Ohm/Km KN KN 4.09 4.0 4.13 13.14 35.51 2.208 2.08 1.98 5 4.72 4.6 4.77 17.50 47.30 1.661 2.78 2.64 7 STEEL WIRES: The properties of the steel wires to be used in the construction of the stranded steel cored aluminium wires shall be as under: -

5.

TABLE-III
STEEL WIRE USED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS, GALVANISED STEEL REINFORCED. Diameter Nominal Min. Max. Cross sectional area nominal diameter wire. 4 mm2 1.936 13.14 Mass of Breaking load Before After stranding stranding

1 mm 1.57 4.09 7.

2 mm

3 mm

1.54 1.60 4.01 4.17

5 Kg / Km 15.10 102.48

6 KN 2.70 17.27

7 KN 2.57 16.41

TOLERANCES ON NOMINAL SIZES: (a) (b) A tolerance of + 1% shall be permitted on the nominal diameter of aluminium wire. A tolerance of + 2% shall be permitted on the nominal diameter of galvanized steel wire.

8.

FREEDOM FROM DEFECTS: The wires shall be smooth and free from inequalities, spills and splits.
Page 55 of 291

9.

JOINTS IN WIRES & CONDUCTORS:

9.1 Aluminium conductor steel reinforced: 9.1.1 Aluminium wires: No two joints shall occur in the aluminium wires closer together than 15 meters. 9.1.2 Steel wires: No joints shall be permitted in steel wires used for ACSR of size 80 mm2 aluminium area (7/4.09 mm). In the case of ACSR of 100 mm2 aluminium area (6/4.72 + 7/1.57mm) having seven galvanized steel wires, joints in individual wires shall be permitted but no two joints shall be less than 15 meters apart in the complete steel core. 10. Stranding: (i)

The wires used in construction of a galvanized steel reinforced aluminium conductor shall, before stranding satisfy all the relevant requirements of this standard for solid wires. (ii) Lay Ratio: The lay ratio for aluminium and steel wires in case of ACSR shall be within limits given below:ratio for No of wires Ratio Al wire Lay ratio for steel Lay dia to steel wire(6 wire layer) aluminium wire wire dia Al Steel Min Max Min Max 6 1 1.000 --10 14 6 7 3.000 13 28 10 14 11. Tests: The samples of individual wires for the tests shall normally be taken before stranding. The manufacturer shall carry out test in samples taken out at least from 10% of aluminium wire spools and 10% of steel wire coils. However, when desired by the purchaser, the test samples may be taken from the stranded wires. The material consumed or destroyed during testing will be to the account of supplier. The wire shall comply with the following test as per IS: 398 (Part-II) 1976 with latest amendments: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) 12. Breaking Load Test Ductility Test Wrapping Test Resistance Test Galvanising Test

Packing & Marking: The conductors shall be wound on non-returnable reels or drums conforming to IS: 1778-1980 (specification for reel and drums).

12.1

Packing:

12.1.1 The gross mass for various conductors shall not exceed by more than 10% of the values given in the following table: Page 56 of 291

Conductor Size ACSR 80 mm2 Al. Area (7/4.09 mm) 100 mm2 Al. Area (6/4.72 mm + 7/1.57 mm)

Gross Mass 1500 Kg. 2000 Kg.

12.1.2 The reels shall be of such construction as to assure delivery of the conductor in the field free from displacement and damage and should be able to with stand all stresses due to handling and stringing operations so that conductor surface is not dented, scratched or damaged in any way during transport. The conductor shall be properly lagged on the drums and method of lagging to be employed may be clearly stated.

12.1.3 The Conductor drum should be suitable for wheel mounting before reeling, cardboard or other suitable material shall be secured to the drum and inside the flanges of the drum. After reeling the conductor, the exposed surfaces should be wrapped with suitable soft material to save the conductor from dirt and grit. Any space between drum lagging and conductor should be suitably filled with soft filler material compactly packed. 12.2 Length & Variation in Lengths: The normal length of various ACSR Conductor shall be as given in the following table: Conductor Size ACSR 80 mm2 Al. Area(7/ 4.09 mm) 100 mm2 Al. Area (6/4.72 mm + 7/1.57 mm)
12.2.1 Longer Lengths shall be acceptable.

Normal Conductor length 1.5 Km 2.0 Km

12.2.2 Short lengths not less than 50% of the standard lengths, shall be acceptable to the maximum extent of 10% of the quantity ordered. 12.3 Marking: The following information shall be marked on each drum: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) 13. Trade mark if any. Manufacturers name Drum No. or Identification No. Size of Conductor. Number and lengths of conductor. Gross mass of the package. Net mass of conductor. ISI markation.

Rejection and Retests: If any one of the test piece first selected for testing fails to pass the tests, three further samples from the same batch shall be selected for testing, one of which shall be from the length from which original test samples was taken unless that length has been withdrawn by the supplier. Should the test pieces from any of these three additional samples fail, the batch be deemed not to comply with the standard.
Page 57 of 291

14.

Inspection: All tests and Inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture unless otherwise specially agreed upon by the manufacturer and the HSEB at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchase or his authorised representative shall have access at reasonable times to manufacturers work to inspect and witness the test of the conductor being manufactured. As regards correctness of the length of ACSR conductor, the same is subject to final checking and measurement by the consignee and the firm shall be responsible for all the shortage, damages etc. if any. The HSEB reserves the right to have the test carried out at the cost of manufacturer/supplier by an independent agency whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply.

15.

Guaranteed Technical Particulars: Guaranteed Technical Particulars of the conductor should be given in the Appendix-I attached herewith the specification. Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be given in addition to those listed in the Appendix-I. *******

Page 58 of 291

APPENDIX - I GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CONDUCTORS 1. Code word. 2. Makers name, address and country. (a) Aluminium rods. (b) Steel wire/rods. (c) Complete Conductor. 3. Stranding and wire diameter. (a) Aluminium (b) Steel 4. Nominal copper area in sq. mm. 5. Nominal equivalent aluminium area in sq. mm. 6. Cross sectional area in sq. mm. Of (a) Aluminium strand. (b) Steel strand. (c) Conductor strand. 7. Actual aluminium area in sq. mm. 8. Dia-meter of complete conductor in mm. 9. Minimum breaking load in KN: Before After stranding stranding (a) Aluminium wire (b) Steel wire 10. Minimum breaking load of conductor. 11. Purity of aluminium rods. 12. Zinc coating (a) No. of duration of dips. (b) Weight of zinc coating. 13. Maximum working tension of conductor. 14. Weight in Kg. Per KM (a) Aluminium (b) Steel (c) Conductor 15. Resistance in ohms/Km at 200C (a) Aluminium wire. (b) ACSR Cond. 16. (a) Continuous max. current rating of conductors in still air at 50 0C ambient temperature: (b)Temperature rise for above current in 0C. 17. Modulus of elasticity (Practical) of the conductor. 18. Coefficient of linear expansion. (a) Aluminium (b) Steel (c) Conductor. 19. Percentage of carbon in steel wire rods.
Page 59 of 291

amps.

20. Standard length. 21. Tolerance, if any, on standard length. 22. Initial and final sags and tension and string charts whether furnished. 23. No. of standard length in the reel / drum. 24. Dimension of the reel. 25. Weight of the conductor in reel / drum in Kg. 26. Weight of reel / drum in Kg. 27. Gross weight of reel/drum including weight of the conductor. 28. Standard according to which the conductor will be manufactured and tested. 29. Other particulars, if any. _______

Page 60 of 291

UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No. CSC-X/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

TECHNICAL SPECIFCTION

FOR

HARD DRAWN STRANDED STEEL CORED ALUMUINIUM CODUCTORS ( 20, 30 & 50 MM2 )

Issue Month: JUNE 2009

Common Specifications

Page 61 of 291

Committee UHBVN &DHBVN

Technical Specification for Hard drawn stranded Steel Cored Aluminum Conductor for overhead low, medium and 11kV transmission lines. (20mm2, 30mm2 & 50mm2)
1. SCOPE:This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply & delivery FOR destination, of Squirrel-20 mm2, weasel-30 mm2 & Rabbit-50mm2 ACSR conductor for use on 11 kV medium and lowtension overhead power transmission lines. 2. APPLICABLE STANDARD :Except when they conflict with the specific requirements. In this specifications, the conductors shall comply in all respects with the latest Indian Standard Specification IS: 398-(part-II)-1996, 4826-1976. (Galvanized coaling on round steel wires), IS: 1521-1972 (Method of lenses Testing), IS: latest version thereof. 3. MATERIAL:The conductor shall be made from the hard drawn Aluminum and gavials all steel wires having mechanical and electrical properties as per clause 4, 5 & 6.The Aluminum and galvanized steel wires shall have physical constants conforming to clause 3 & 4 respectively of IS: 398/Part-II-1996 or latest version thereof. The hot dipped or electrolytic process galvanized coating on steel wires may be applied. The uniformity of galvanizing and weight of coating shall be in accordance with IS: 4826-1976 or latest version thereof. The Steel wires shall have evenly and uniformly coating with electrolytic high-grade 99.95% purity Zinc complying with latest issue of IS: 209 for Zinc. The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have a minimum Zinc coating of 250gm/m2 after stranding. 4. SIZES:The sizes and properties for stranded steel cored aluminum conductors shall be as under:Page 62 of 291

1980(Reels & Drums for bare conductors), or the

Nominal Aluminum area 1 mm2 20 Squirrel 30 Weasel 50 Rabbit

Stranding & wire diameter. Al 2 Mm2 6/2.11 6/2.59 6/3.35 Steel 3 Mm2 1/2.11 1/2.59 1/3.35

Sectio nal area of Al 4 Mm2 20.98 31.61 52.88

Total secti onal area. 5 Mm2 24.48 36.88 61.70

Approx . Overall dla 6 Mm2 6.33 7.77 10.05

Appr ox. mass . 7 Kg/k m 85 128 214

Calculate d Resistan 0 ce at 20 C Max. 8 Ohm/Km. 1.394 0.9289 0.5524

Appx. Calculate d Breaking Load 9 KN 7.61 11.12 18.25

STRANDED REINFORCED: 5.

ALUMINIUM

CONDUCTORS

GALVANISED

ALUMINIUM WIRES:The properties of Aluminum winos to be used in the construction of the stranded wires shall be as follows:Solid conductors used in the construction of stranded steel reinforce Aluminum Conductors galvanized:-

Diameter

Cross sectiona l Nominal Diamete r vireo Min. 2 mm 2.09 2.56 3.32 Max. 3 mm 2.13 2.62 3.38 4 mm 3.497 5.269 8.814

Mass

Resistan ce at 20oC Max.

Breakin g Load before strandin g (Min)

Breakin g Load after strandin g (Min.)

Nominal 1 mm 2.11 2.59 3.35

a b c

5 Kg/Km 9.45 14.24 23.82

6 Ohn/Km 8.237 5.490 3.265

7 KN 0.63 0.89 1.43

8 KN 0.60 0.85 1.36

6.

STEEL WIRES :The properties of the steel wire to be used in the construction of the stranded Steel Cored Aluminum Wires be as under:Solid steel wires used in the construction of Aluminum Conductors galvanized, steel reinforced:-

Nominal

Diameter Min. Max. 2 mm 2.07 3 mm 2.15

1 mm 2.11

Cross sectional area or Nominal diameter wire 4 mm2 3.497

mass

Breaking load(Min.) Before After Stranding Stranding 6 KN 4.60 7 KN 4.37

5 Km/Kg 27.27

Page 63 of 291

2.59 3.35

2.54 3.28

2.64 3.42

5.269 8.814

41.09 68.75

6.92 11.58

6.57 11.00

7.

FREE FROM DEFECTS : The wires shall be smooth and free from inequalities, spills and splits. The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact, uniform and free from all imperfections including spills & splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions, scuff marks, kinks, dents, press marks, over-riding, looseness, pressure and/or unusual bangle noise, on tapping, material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spots, dirt, grit etc.

8.

JOINTS IN WIRES AND CONDUCTORS : Aluminum conductors Steel reinforced: No joint shall be permitted in the individual Aluminum wires in the outermost layer of the finished conductor. No two joints shall occur in the aluminum wires closer together than 15 meters of each other in the complete stranded conductor. During standing no Aluminum wire welds shall be made for the purpose of achieving the required conductor length. Steel wires: No joints shall be permitted.

9.

ANDING i. The wires used in construction of stranded conductor shall before stranding satisfy all the requirements of this standard for solid wires. ii. The successive layers shall be stranded in opposite directions. The wires in each layer shall be evenly and closely stranded round the underlying wire or wires. iii. Lay ratio: the ratio for aluminum in case of ACSR shall be within limits given below: No. of wires Al. 6 14 Steel 1 Ratio Aluminum wire Dia. to Steel wire 1.000 Lay Ratio for Aluminum Wire Min. Max 10

10.

Tests:The sample of individual wires for the tests shall normally be taken before stranding. The manufacture shall carry out tests on samples taken but at least from 10% of Aluminum wire spools and 10% of steel wire coils. However, when desired by the purchaser the test sample should be taken
Page 64 of 291

from the stranded wire. They shall be obtained by cutting 1.2 meters from the outer ends of the finished conductor form not more than 10% of the finished reels. The material consumed or destroyed during testing will be to the account of the supplier. The wires shall comply with the following test as per IS: 398 (Part-II)-1996: Type Tests i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. Measurement of diameters of individual Al. & Steel wiles. Measurement of Lay-ratio of each layer. Breaking load of individual wires. Ductility test. Wrapping test. Resistance test. Galvanizing test. Visual examination. Measurement of diameters of individual Al. & Steel wiles. Measurement of Lay-ratio of each layer. Breaking load of individual wires. Ductility test. Wrapping test. Resistance test on Aluminum wires. Galvanizing test

Acceptance Tests:

Routine Tests: The routine tests shall be done same as acceptance tests and shall be carried out before & after stranding. 11. PACKING & MARKING :The conductor shall be wound in reels on non returnable wooden drums provided with lagging of adequate strength constructed to protect, the conductor against damage & displacement during transit, storage and subsequent handing which should be strong enough to withstand the stresses during handling and transportation. 11.1 PACKING : The conductor shall be wound in reels on non-returnable wooden drums, which should be strong enough to withstand the stresses during handling & transpiration.
Page 65 of 291

1.1.1 The gross mass of various conductors shall not exceed by more than 10% of the values given in the following table:Conductor size 20mm2Al. Area (7/2.11mm) 30mm2Al. Area (7/2.59mm) 50mm2Al. Area (7/3.35mm) Gross Mass 1000Kg. 1000Kg. 1500Kg.

11.1.2 The nominal wire length shall be 2 KM. but longer lengths shall be acceptable. Short lengths not less than 1 Km each shall be acceptable to the maximum extent of 10% of the quantity ordered. 11.2 MARKING: The following information shall be marked on each drum: a) Manufacturers name. b) Trade mark if any. c) Drum or Identification number. d) Size of conductor. e) No. of lengths conductor. f) Gross mass of the packing. g) Not mass of conductor. h) ISI certification mark, if any. i) Position of the conductor. j) Name & Address of the consignee. k) Month & Year of manufacture. INSPECTION:All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise specially agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchase all responsible facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access at all responsible time to manufactures works to inspect and witness the tests of the conductor being manufactured, As regards correctness of the length of ACSR Conductor, the same is subject to final checking and measurement by the consignee and the firm shall be responsible for all the shortages, damages etc. if any. The samples are taken for test after stranding and if any selected reel falls in the retest, the manufacture may test each and every reel and submit them for re-

12

Page 66 of 291

inspection Inspection. All rejected material should be suitably marked and segregated. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and tested unless the Purchaser. In writing waives off the inspection. In the later case also, the conductor shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified are completed and approved by Purchaser. The UHBVN/DHBVN reserves the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of manufacturer / supplier by an independent agency whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Supplier of any of his responsibilies for meeting all requirements of the specifications and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective. Qty of material out of lot recommended to be physically checked shall be as under:i. For ACSR conductor up to 30mm sq.: 10% subject to a minimum of one drum. ii. For ACSR conductor above 30mm sq.: a. The inspecting officer shell select 10% of the drums offered for Inspection at random and check as under: i. Gross weight of each drum. ii. Length of conductor on each drum. iii. Weight of each empty drum. iv. The inspecting officer then shall calculate the average weight per KM of the conductor on the basis of net weight and length of conductor of 10% drums checked as above and shall also calculate average weight of empty drum. b. For the balance 90% drums: i. The inspecting officer shall measure the gross weight of each drum. ii. After deducting the average weight of one empty drum (a-iv), the inspecting officer shall find out the net weight of conductor on each drum. c. The inspecting officer shall provide his seal on both ends of ACSR conductor of all the drums offered for inspection as (a) & (b) above. The inspecting officer shall write in the inspection note the verified length and weight of conductor of individual drum out of 10% drums as per a above and calculate length and verify gross weight of
Page 67 of 291

13

each drum as per (b) above. Consignee will take the measurement on the basis of inspection note received by him. GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:GTPs of the conductor shall be given in the Appendix-I attached, herewith the specification. Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier might also be given in addition those listed in the appendix.

14

Challenge Clause:The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigain & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved G.T.Ps the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @ 10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.

Page 68 of 291

GUARANTED TECTIICAL PARTTCULARS PF CONDUCTOR 1. 2. Code word. Makers name, address and country. a.) b.) c.) 3. a) b) 4. 5. 6. Aluminum rods. Steel wires/reels. Complete conducer. Aluminum. Steel.

Stranding and wire diameter.

Nominal equivalent copper area in sq. mm. Nominal equivalent Aluminum area in sq. mm. Gross sectional area in sq. mm of. a) b) c) Aluminum strand. Steel Strand. Conductor strand.

7. 8. 9.

Actual Aluminum area in sq. mm. Diameter of complete conductor in mm. Minimum breaking load in KV. a) b) Aluminum wire. Steel wire. Before Stranding After Stranding

10. 11. 12.

Minimum breaking load of conductor. Purely of Aluminum rods. Zinc coating. a) b) c) d) Number of 1 minute dips. Weight of zinc coating. Process of Galvanizing. Quality of Zinc.

13. 14.

Maximum working tension of conductor. Mass in Kg per Km a) b) c) Aluminum. Steel. Conductor

15.

Resistance in Ohms/Km at 20C

Page 69 of 291

a) b) 16. a) b) 17. 18.

Aluminum. ACSR Conductor. Continuous max. cement rating of conductor in still air at 50 C ambient Temperature-Amps. Temperature rise for above current in Degree C.

Modulo us of elasticity (Practical) of conductor. Co-efficient of linear expansion. a) a) b) Aluminum. Steel. Conductor.

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

Percentage of carbon in steel wire rods. Standard length. Tolerance if any in standard length. Initial and final sags and tension and string charts whether furnished. No. of standards length in one reel/drum. Dimension of the reel. Mass of the conductor in one reel/drum in Kg. Mass of the reel drum. Gross mass of reel/drum including wt. of the conductor. Standard according to which the conductor will be manufacture and tested. Other particulars if any. Whether Test Certifiable enclosed. Joints in Strands a) b) c) d) Steel Aluminum of. Method of making joints. Ultimate Tensile strength of joint. Yes/No

Name & Address of Supplier

Page 70 of 291

UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No. CSC-VI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GSS WIRE OF 7/8 SWG (4MM)

Issue Month : June 2009

Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

Page 71 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GSS WIRE OF 7/8 SWG 4 mm and 7/14 SWG (2.24mm)
1. SCOPE :

This specification covers the manufacture, testing and inspection of GSS Wire of sizes 7/8 SWG / (4mm) and 7/14 SWG (2.24mm).
2. STANDARDS :

The GSS wires shall conform to IS: 2141-1979, IS-4826 (1979) and 2633 (1964) or the latest version thereof.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. 3.8. 3.9. 3.10.

Max. ambient temperature Min. ambient temperature Max. relative humidity Min. relative humidity Average no. of dust storm days per annum Isoceraunic level Average no. of rainy days per annum Average rain fall Altitude above mean sea level Max. wind pressure

50 Degree C -2.5 Degree C 100% 26% 35 45 Nearly 120 days 900mm Less than 1000 M 195 kg/Square M

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: 7/8 SWG

1. 2. 3.

7/14 SWG 700N/mmsq. 1834 kgf 3000M

Min. tensile strength Min. Breaking load Min. length of strand without joints

700N/mm sq. 5845 kgf 1000M

In case where joints are permitted they shall be made by welding or brazing. Joints in the same wire shall be departed by a length not less then that indicated at point (III) under Technical parameters (clause 4) and joint in the different wires shall not be less than 15 M apart.

Page 72 of 291

4. TESTS:

The tests as per IS: 2141-1979 or its latest version including the tests for chemical analysis is provided therein shall be carried out. The zinc coating of the galvanized wire shall be as specified in IS: 4826/1979 with latest amendments and testing shall be carried out as specified in ISS: 2633/1964 or the latest amendment thereof.
5. INSPECITON:

The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. In case the supplier is not in position to get these tests carried out at his works, such tests may got be carried out by him at any Govt. recognized test agency at his own expenses.
6. TEST CERTIFICATES:

The supplier shall supply one set of test certificates from a recognized Govt. agency in respect of quality as per IS: 2141-1979 with latest amendments thereof for approval of the purchaser.
7. MARKING :

Each coil of GSS wire shall be marked legibly with the: a. Manufacturers name or trade mark. b. Lot number and coil number. c. A brief description and quality of material. d. Weight of the coil. e. ISI certification mark may also be marked.
8. PACKING:

The supplier shall be responsible for proper packing of material so as to avoid any damage during the transport and storage and to ensure correct dispatch to the destination. The length of strand shall be as per ISS.
9. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE:
Page 73 of 291

The name and place of manufacture should be indicated in the tender.

10. CHALLENGE CLAUSE:

The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any testing house / in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating or un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.

Page 74 of 291

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL DATA

7/8 SWG 4mm
1. 2. 3.

7/14 SWG 2.24mm

Tensile strength Breaking load. Min. length of strand without joint.

Page 75 of 291

UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No. CSC-IX/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

G.I. WIRE

Issue Month: JUNE 2009 Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

Page 76 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. WIRE: 1. SCOPE : This specification covers the manufacture, testing and inspection of G.I. wires. 2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS: Except when they conflict with the specific requirements of this specification, the G.I. wires shall comply with the provisions of IS: 280-1978 and IS: 7887-1975 or the latest version thereof. 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 4. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: Max. ambient temperature Min. ambient temperature Max. relative humidity Min. relative humidity Average no. of dust storm days / annum Isoceranic level Average no. of rainy days per annum Average rainfall Altitude above mean sea level Max. wind pressure Pollution 50 Degree C -2.5 Degree C 100% 26% 35 45 Nearly 120 days 900mm Less than 1000m 195kg/sq.m Moderate

TECHNICAL PARICULARS: I) II ) III ) Size of G.I. wire Tensile strength Quality 4mm dia 56 to 95 kgf per sq.mm Hard

5.

MATERIAL : 5.1 5.2 The wires shall be drawn from the wire rod confirming to IS: 78871975 or the latest version thereof. The requirement for chemical composition for the wires shall confirm to IS: 7887.

Page 77 of 291

5.3

The wires shall be sound, free from split surface flaws, rough jagged and imperfect edges and other detrimental defects on the surface of the wires.

6.

GALVANISING : The wires shall be galvanized with Heavy coating as per IS: 48261979 or the latest version thereof.

7.

TOLERANCE IN DIAMETER: The tolerance on nominal diameter at any section of wire shall not exceed (+) (-) 2.5%. Further, the maximum difference between the diameter at any two cross- Sections of wires shall not exceed 2.5%.

8.

TESTS :

The following tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 280-1978 or the latest version thereof as per sampling criteria stipulated therein. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 9. Dimensional check (dia) refer clause 7 above. Visual inspection regarding freedom from defects-refer clause 5.3 above. Tensile test. Wrapping test. Coating test-refer clause 6 above. Chemical composition. The supplier shall supply from any Govt. recognized test agency the test certificates for the material offered as per IS: 280-1978 or the latest version thereof for the approval of purchaser. If the G.I. wire is bearing ISI marking then the certificate from the approved Govt. agencies will not be required. It will not however obviate the necessity of inspection /testing by the inspecting officers of the Nigam.

TEST CERTIFICATES :

10.

INSPECITON : The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch as IS: 280-1978 or latest version thereof by an authorized representative
Page 78 of 291

of the Nigam. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these tests carried out at his works such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt. recognized tests agency at his own expenses. 11. PACKING : The wires shall be supplied in 50-70 kg. Coils, each coils having single continuous length. Each coil of wire shall be suitably bound and fastened compactly and shall be protected by suitable wrapping. 12. MARKING: Each coil shall be provided with a label fixed firmly on the inner part of the coil bearing the following information. 1. Manufactures name or trade mark. 2. Lot number and coil number. 3. Size. 4. Grade. 5. Mass. 6. Length. 7. Material may also be marked with ISI certification mark. 13. 14. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE : The name and place of manufacture should be given in the tender. CHALLENGE CLAUSE: The material offered /received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange o supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @ 10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.

Page 79 of 291

GUARATEED TECHNICAL DATA: 1. Tensile strength. 2. Quality. 3. Galvanized. 4. Min. weight of one coil.

Page 80 of 291

SPECIFICATION NO. HSD/S-364/ST-163

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BLACK HEXAGONAL M.S. BOLTS AND NUTS.

OFFICE OF THE CHIEF ENGINEER/PLG. & CONST. TRANSMISSION DESIGN DTE., HARYANA STATE ELECY. BOARD, IDYUT NAGAR, HISAR.

ISSUE OF MONTH :__________

Page 81 of 291

Technical Specification for Black Hexagonal M.S. Bolts & Nuts. 1. SCOPE : This specification covers the manufacture, testing before despatch, supply and delivery F.O.R. destination of black hexagonal MS Bolts & Nuts of various sizes. 2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS : Unless otherwise modified in this specification, the bolts and nuts shall comply with Indian Standard Specifications IS: 1363 - 1967 as amended from time to time. 3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : All the material is required to work satisfactorily under the following site conditions : 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 Max. temperature Min. temperature Max. relative humidity Min. relative humidity Average No. of rainy days Per Annum. Average annual rain fall Average number of dust storms days /Annum Isoceraunic level Max. wind pressure Altitude above mean sea Level. 47.50C -2. 50C 100% 26% Nearly 120 days. 900 mm 35 45 195Kg /m2 Less than 1000 Mtrs. Moderate

4.

3.11 Pollution WORKMANSHIP :

Full threaded bolts shall not be used. The bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads which shall be neatly finished concentric and square with the
Page 82 of 291

shank and free from burrs, scale and other defects. Threads in nuts shall not be torn or ragged and shall be of proper contour. The fits of the nuts shall be such that there will be no locking of the nuts. Nuts and Bolts of the same size shall be interchangeable. The thread of nuts & bolts shall have coarse pitch screw threads as per I.S.S. - 4218-1967 or its latest amendments and shall meet with all applicable technical supply conditions covered under this standard. 5. 5.1 PARTICULARS OF MATERIAL : MECHANICAL PROPERTIES : The mechanical properties of bolts covered in this standard shall conform to the property clause 4.6 and those for nuts shall conform to the property clause 4 specified in IS: 1367-1967 or its latest edition. 6. GRADE : Bolts & Nuts covered in this specification shall conform to Black Grade B, specified in IS: 1367-1967. 7. DESIGNATION : Black Bolts & Nuts covered in this specification shall be designated as per table I of IS : 1363-1967. 8. DIMENSIONS : The dimensions for black bolts & nuts shall be as given in table 2 & 3. The bolts and nuts shall have coarse pitch screw threads conforming to IS : 4218-1967 (ISO Metric Screw Threads). Preferred length diameter combinations for black hexagonal bolts are given in table-4 IS : 1363-1967. 9. REQUIREMENTS : 9.1 9.2 The method of sampling and acceptance criteria of black hexagonal Bolts The Bolts & Nuts conforming to this standard shall comply with the and Nuts shall be in accordance with IS: 2614-1964. requirements of IS: 1367-1967 in regard to requirements not specified in this standard. 10 TESTS : All types of tests including routine tests shall be carried out according IS : 1367-1967 or its latest amendment. 11. INSPECTION : to

Page 83 of 291

The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by authorised representative of the Board in respect of its quality. The manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer, of the purchaser, all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturers works to inspects and witness the tests of the material manufactured. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent Govt, agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of material supplied. 12. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE : The tenderer shall state the place of manufacture, testing and name of the manufacturer of the various items included in his tender. 13. PACKING AND TRANSPORT : The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the material and marking on the consignment, so as to avoid any damage during transport and storage and to ensure correct despatch to the destination. The packing shall be conforming to the requirement laid down in IS: 3256-1965 or its latest amendment. 14. DRAWING AND LITERATURE : Illustrated and descriptive literature on the material offered must be submitted along with the tender. 15. RAW MATERIAL : No assistance whatsoever for arranging the raw material for manufacture of Bolts & Nuts shall be provided by the purchaser. The delivery shall not be dependent upon availability of raw material. 16. MARKING : The material shall be marked with the ISI certification mark. The sealed container of bolts & nuts shall be marked with: a) Manufacturer name & trade mark. b) Place of manufacturers. c) The name & designation of consignee ( to be furnished by the purchaser). d) Ultimate destination as required by the purchaser. e) The marking shall be stencilled in delible ink on gunny bags. f) Net weight with description of material.
Page 84 of 291

Sd/Superintending Engineer/Design, for Chief Engineer/P&C, Transmission, Design Directorate, HSEB, Hisar.

Page 85 of 291

ANNEXURE A

Sr. No.

Description

Quantity Required

1. 2.

Black Hexogonal M.S. Bolts Black Hexagonal M.S. Nuts

Rs. ________________ Rs. ________________

Page 86 of 291

UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No. CSC- XXIX/DH/UH/P&D/20092010

TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR PORCELAIN INSULATROS AND INSULATORS FITTINGS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD POWER LINES

Issue of the Month:

Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

Page 87 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PORCELAIN INSULATORS INSULATORS FITTINGS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD LINES: 1. SCOPE :

AND

2.

This specification covers the details of the porcelain insulators and insulator fittings for use on 11 KV overhead power lines met with in rural Electric distribution systems. APPLICABLE STANDARDS : Except when they conflict with the specific requirements of this specification, the insulators shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 731 1971 or the latest version thereof and the insulator fittings shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 2486 (Part-I), IS 2486 (Part-II) 1974 & IS: 3188 or the latest version thereof or equivalent international standards.

3.

CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : The equipment is required to operate satisfactory under the following site conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Daily Max. ambient temperature Max. yearly temperature weighted average 600C (-)50C 400C ambient 320C 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 Kg./m Sq.

Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) Avg. No. of Rainy days/year Avg. annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure GENERAL REQUIREMENT :

4. 4.1 4.2

The porcelain shall be sound free from defects thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed. Unless otherwise specified, the glaze shall be brown in colours. The glaze shall cover all the porcelain parts of the insulator except those areas which serve as support during firing or are left unglazed for the purpose of assembly.
Page 88 of 291

4.3

The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. The porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal. Cement used in the construction of the insulator shall not cause fracture kby expansion or loosing by contraction and proper care shall be taken to locate the individual parts correctly during cementing. The cement shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings and its thickness shall be as uniform as possible. The insulators should preferably be manufactured in automatic temperature controlled kilns to obtain uniform baking and better electrical & mechanical properties. CLASSIFICATION AND DIMENSIONS :

4.4

4.5

5. 5.1 5.2 5.3

Both pin & strain insulators shall conform to type B of IS: 731. The dimension of pin insulators shall be as shown in the drawings. The strain insulators shall be ball & socket type or Tongue & clevis type, as required by the purchaser. The dimensions of these insulators shall be as per IS: 2486 (Part-II). TEST VOLTAGES : The test voltages of insulators shall be as under:

6.

Highest system voltage

Visible discharge test

Wet power frequency withstand test.

Power frequency puncture withstand test (Pin Insulators)

Power frequency puncture withstand test (Strain Insulators)

Impulse voltage withstand test.

KV 12

(rms) KV (rms) 9

KV 35

(rms) KV 105

(rms) KV (rms) KV (Peak) 1.3 times 75 the actual dry flash over voltage of insulator

7. 7.1

FAILING LOAD : Electro mechanical failing load (for Pin Insulators only). applied in transverse direction.
Page 89 of 291

The

insulators shall be suitable for a minimum failing load of 5 KN

7.2

Electro mechanical failing load (for strain insulators only). applied in axially.

The

insulators shall be suitable for a minimum failing load of 45 KN

8.

CREEPAGE DISTANCE : The maximum creepage distance shall be as under: Highest voltage system Normal & moderately polluted atmosphere 230 mm Heavily polluted Atmosphere Pin Insulator 320 mm strain insulator 400 mm

12 KV

Higher value of creepage distance has been specified for strain insulators as these are normally used in horizontal position in 11 KV lines. 9. TESTS: The insulators shall comply with the following tests as per IS 731 or equivalent international standards. 9.1 TYPE TESTS : The following shall constitute the type tests: A) B) C) D) E) F) G) H) I) J) K) L) Visual examination. Verification of dimensions. Impulse voltage withstand test. Wet power frequency voltage withstand test. Temperature cycles test. Electro mechanical failing load test. (for strain insulator only). Mechanical failing load test. (for Pin Insulator only). Puncture test. Porosity test. Galvanizing test. Visible discharge test. 24 hours mechanical strength test. (for strain insulators only).
Page 90 of 291

9.2

ACCEPTANCE TESTS : The test samples after having withstood the routine test shall be subjected to the following acceptance tests in the order indicated below: A) B) C) D) E) F) Verification of dimensions. Temperature cycle tests. Electro mechanical failing load test (for strain insulator only). Puncture test (for strain insulator only). Porosity test and. Galvanizing test.

9.3

ROUTINE TESTS : The following test shall be carried out as routine tests: A) B) C) Visual examination. Mechanical routine test (for strain insulator only). Electrical routine test. (for strain insulator only).

10. 10.1

MARKING: Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following: A) Name or trade mark of the manufacturer. B) Month and year of manufacture. C) Min. failing load in KN. D) ISI certification mark, if any. Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing. PACKING : All insulators (without fittings) shall be packed in wooden crates suitable for easy and rough handling land acceptable for rail transport, where more than one insulator is packed in a crate wooden separators shall be fixed between the insulators to keep individual insulator in position without movement within the crate. PART-B INSULATOR FITTINGS :

10.1.1 11.

12.

SCOPE :
Page 91 of 291

This specification covers details and test requirements for: 1) Pins for 11 KV Pin Insulators. 2) Fittings for strain insulators.

13.

APPLICABLE STANDARD : Pins shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2486 (Part I & II) with latest amendments. Fitting for strain insulator shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2486, Part-I to IV with latest amendments or equivalent international standards.

14.1 14.1.1

Pins for Pin Insulators. General requirements : The pins shall be a single piece obtained preferably by the process of forging. They shall not be made by joining, welding, shrink fitting or any other process from more than one piece of material. They shall be of good finish, free from flaws and other defects. The finish of the cellar shall be such that a sharp angle between the cellar and the shank is avoided. All ferrous pins, nuts & washer except those made of stainless steel shall be galvanized. The threads of nuts & tapped holes shall be cut after galvanizing and shall be well oiled or greased.

14.2

DIMENSIONS : Pins shall be of small steel head type S-I as per IS : 3486 (Part II) having stalk length of 165 mm and shank length of 150mm with minimum failing load of 5 KN.

14.3

TEST : Insulator pins shall comply with the following test as per IS: 2486 (Part-I) or equivalent international standards.

14.3.1

ACCEPTANCE TEST : a) b) c) Checking of threads on heads. Galvanizing test. Mechanical test.

Page 92 of 291

14.3.2 14.3.3

ROUTINE TEST : Visual examination test. TYPE TEST : a) b) c) d) Checking of threads on heads. Galvanizing test. Mechanical test. Visual examination test.

15. 15.1

STRAIN INSULATORS SETS : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS : All forging and casting shall be of good finish and free from laws and other defects. All edges on the outside of fittings such as at the eye, clevis & holes, shall be rounded. All parts of different fittings which provide for interconnection shall be made such that sufficient clearance is provided at the connection point to ensure free movement and suspension of the insulator string assembly. All eye and clevis connections shall be free but the care shall be taken that too much clearance between eye & the tongues of the clevis is avoided. All ferrous fittings and the parts other than those stain less steel, shall be galvanized, small fittings like spring washers, nuts etc. may be electroplated with zinc.

15.1.1

TYPE : Clevis and tongue type insulator set shall be supplied, the nominal dimensions of the clevis and tongue type insulator set shall be as given in IS: 2486.

15.1.2

TESTS : Strain insulator sets shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 2486 (Part I).

15.1.2.1

TYPE TESTS : A) B) C) Mechanical test. Electrical resistance test (for tension clamps only). Heating cycles test (for tension clamps only). Dimensional.
Page 93 of 291

15.1.2.2

SAMPLE TEST : A)

B) 15.1.2.3 A) B) 15.2

Galvanizing check electroplating test. Visual check. Mechanical test.

ROUTINE TEST :

STRAIN CLAMPS : Suitable aluminum alloys clamps shall be provided alongwith the fittings to suit ACSR conductors 7/2. 11 mm 7/3. 35mm. The ultimate strength of clamps should not be less than 3000 Kgs.

16. 16.1

MARKING : The caps and clamps shall have mark on them with the following information : a) b) Name or trade mark of the manufacture. Country of manufacture.

17. 17.1

PACKING : For packing of GI pins, strain clamps & related hardware, double gunny bags or wooden cases if deemed necessary shall be employed. The heads & threads portions of pins & the fittings shall be properly protected against damage. The gross weight of the packing shall not normally exceed 50 Kg. Different fittings shall be packed in different bags or cases and shall be complete with their minor accessories fitted in place. All nuts shall be hand tightened over the bolts & screwed up to the farthest point.

17.2 18.

The packages containing fittings may also be marked with the ISI certification mark. TEST & TEST CERTIFICATES : The tenderers shall submit Photostat copies of all the tests including type test as prescribed in the relevant ISS from any accredited laboratory

19.

GUARANTEED & OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : These particulars shall be furnished strictly as per Annexure A in duplicate. Any deviation from this specification shall be clearly brought out separately.

20.

PLACE OF MANUFACTURE :

Page 94 of 291

The tender shall state the place of manufacturer, testing and name of the manufacturer of the various items included in his Tender. 21. INSPECTION : Inspection of material and supervision of test in accordance with the relevant standards as mentioned in clause 2 & 13 above and supporting drawing and schedules, and approved manufacturer specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or his duly authorized representative. The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of the DHBVN in respect of quality. The manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access to all reasonable time to manufacturers works to inspect and witness the test of the equipment manufactured. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of supplier by an independent Govt. agency wherever there is a dispute regarding the quality of material supplied. The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection. 22. Challenge Clause:The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro
Page 95 of 291

transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed. 23. Warranty Period:The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.

Page 96 of 291

ANNEXURE A GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF PORCELAIN INSULATORS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD POWER LINE : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Makers name and country. Nominal voltage. Highest voltage. Dry one minute power frequencies withstand voltage. Wet Dry one minute power frequencies withstand voltage. Power frequencies withstand voltage. Impulse withstand voltage (1/50 second positive waves ). Visible discharge test voltage. Impulse flashover voltage (1/50 micro second positive waves). Impulse flashover voltage (1/50 micro second negative waves). Dry flashover voltage. Wet flashover voltage. Min. failing load. Minimum creepage distance. Weight per unit. Size of insulators. Standard to which the insulator shall be manufactured and tested. Tolerance in dimensions, if any.

Page 97 of 291

Specification No. CSC-

/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 11 kV 400 A GO SWITCHES

Issue Month:

Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

Page 98 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 kV 400 A GANG OPERATED SWITCHES

SCOPE This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturers works of supply & delivery of 11KV 400 A G.O. switches complete with manually operated equipment and accessories required for their satisfactory operation for their use on distribution sub-station and tapping/sectionalizing points of 11 KV lines. 2. i) APPLICABLE STANDARDS & DESCRIPTION All material used for manufacturing 11 KV G.O. Switches i.e. 11 KV Post Insulators, G.I.Pipe, MS Channel, Brass Male/Female contacts & Arcing Horns shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 2544, IS: 5340 (Part-III) and IS: 9921 (Part I to V). However, Material manufactured as per any other international standard offering material, quality and workmanship of equivalence or better shall also be acceptable. The detailed description of equipment shall be as under: 11 KV, 400 Amps, triple pole gang operated, outdoor type, single throw, single break tilting type manually operated. Air Break Switches, suitable for vertical mounting on structures 6 meters above ground level fitted with 2 no. 11 KV Post Insulators per phase, i.e. 6 no. Post Insulators per switch of standard make conforming to latest versions of IS-2544 & IS5350 (Part-III) complete with fixed & moving contacts base of gun metal cast/, duly electroplated and jaw (U) fixed with spring able strips. The movable contacts i.e. blades will be made of gunmetal/brass/copper casting, duly electroplated. Multi-bolt type clamps of non-ferrous metal will be provided for incoming and outgoing connections. Fixed and moving contacts complete with G.I. Arcing horns fitted on 11KV Post Insulators will be mounted on suitable MS Channel (Vertical). Phase coupler bar will be of 32mm diameter galvanized iron pipe. Operating rod shall be of 25 mm inner diameter and 32 mm outer diameter G. I. Pipe having free length of 5100 mm excluding the length of handle. The sizes of rods used for arcing horns would be 2 SWG M.S. The complete equipment shall be as per latest version of IS-9921 (Part-I to V). MS Channel, C.I. casting for lever and side plates are to be hot dipped Galvanized as per relevant ISS. All other ferrous parts including nuts, bolts and washers are to be hot dipped galvanized. All Current carrying nuts, bolts and washers are to be hot dipped galvanized. The equipment supplied shall also conform to detailed specification with guaranteed technical particulars and approved drawings attached herewith. PARTICULARS OF SYSTEM. The switches shall be used on three-phase 11 KV 50 Hz A.C. Power system having solidly grounded neutral. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
Page 99 of 291

ii)

3.

4.

The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions i) Location At various locations in the state of Haryana ii) Max ambient temperature (deg.c) 60 iii) Min ambient air temperature (deg. c) -5 iv) Max average daily ambient 40 temperature (deg. c) v) Max. yearly weighed average ambient 32 temperature (deg. C) vi) Max. altitude above mean sea level 1000 (Meters) vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age ) 26 viii) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95 ix) Avg. no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Avg. annual rainfall 900mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m2 The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth. 5. Rating 12 KV Nominal system voltage Rated voltage 11 KV Rated current 400 Amps. Rated Frequency 50 HZ Peak current in closed position. 46 KA One minute power frequency withstand voltage between I) Earth & poles 28 KV (rms) ii) Across terminal of open switch. 32 KV (rms) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage between I) Poles & Earth. 75 KV (Peak) ii) Across terminal of open switch. 85 KV (Peak) Min. short time current 18.42 KA for 1 second. 6. SWITCH INSULATION Insulation to ground, insulation between open contacts and insulation between phases of the completely assembled G.O. Switches shall be capable of withstanding the dielectric test voltages specified in IS-9921Part-IV. Insulation between open contacts of a pole shall at least be 15 % more than the insulation between the live parts of pole to ground, so that If any flash- over occurs when switch is open, it shall be to the ground. All insulators provided to form a stack shall conform to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications. The porcelain shall be homogeneous and free from all cavities and flaws. Design of insulators shall ensure ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory operation under site conditions. The design shall also ensure that the losses caused by capacitive current or conduction through dielectric are minimum and that leakage due to moist and dirty insulators surfaces is least. All metal caps
Page 100 of 291

7.

8.

9.

and supports shall be cemented to the porcelain whereas the blades and contact blocks shall be bolted to the metal parts of the insulators thus making the replacement of damaged insulators easy. All ferrous metal parts, flanges, bolts and nuts etc. shall be galvanized. The porcelain post insulators should be from the leading manufacturers like LAMCO, CGL, OBLEM, ELPRO, Raychem RPG, WS, Jayashree, only. G.O. SWITCH OPERATION AND OPERATING MECHANISM The switches shall be suitable for local manual operation. The Operating mechanism shall comprise of operating pipe with intermediate couplings and manual operating handle. Height of operating handle may vary from 1000 to 1300mm. The operating mechanism shall give good mechanical leverage with minimum loose/lost motions. There shall be suitable padlocking arrangement for both ON and OFF positions. BEARING Graded cast rocking type levers supported on side plates/fabricated type as per drawings. Bearing housing shall be weather proof and facilities shall be provided for easy lubrication. PACKING & TRANSPORTATION. The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the material and marking on the consignment to ensure correct dispatch to the destination. All G.O. Switches shall be packed suitably capable of withstanding rough handling for transportation to the various consignees so as to avoid any shortage and damage occurring during transit. Separators shall be fixed between the post insulators and other breakable parts of GO Switch and also between individual GO Switches so as to prevent relative movement to avoid damage. All the labels used on each packing shall be of tin securely bounded with wire and shall have the descriptive marking stamped thereon. All GO Switches damaged during transportation shall be to the suppliers account.

10.

DESIGN FEATURE

10.1 Contact System

The male and female contacts assemblies shall be of sturdy construction and design to ensure I. II. III. Electro dynamic withstand ability during short circuits. Thermal withstand-ability during short circuits. Constant contact pressure even when the live parts of the insulator stacks are subject to tensile stresses due to linear expansion of connected bus bar of flexible conductors either because of temperature variation or strong winds. Self-wiping action during closing and opening. Self-alignment assuring closing of the switch without calling for any adjustment.

IV. V.

Page 101 of 291

10.2 Temperature Rise

Maximum temperature attained by any part of the isolating switches when in service at site under continuous and exposed continuously to the direct rays of sun and the air having temperature of 60 degree centigrade shall not exceed the permissible limits fixed by latest edition IS-9921 (Part-I to V). Maximum temperature rise under the above noted condition should not exceed the permissible limits when corrected for the difference between ambient temperature at site and the reference ambient temperature in IS9921 (Part-I to V).

10.2.1 Arcing horns

A set of adjustable arcing horns made from 2 SWG G. I. Wire shall be mounted on each insulator stack of G.O. Switch. The supplier shall supply a graph showing impulse and power frequency spark over voltage for various gap settings of arcing horns. 11. CURRENT CARRYING PARTS All current carrying parts shall be of non-ferrous metal or alloys and shall be designed to limit sharp points/edges. Design of isolating contacts shall permit easy maintenance and renewal of contacts. 12. NAME PLATES The switches shall be provided with a nameplate, which contains the information in accordance with IS-9921 (part I to V). The name plates will be weather and rust proof. 13. COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT All fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specially mentioned in this specification but which are otherwise necessary for satisfactory working of G.O. switches shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply. 14. TYPE TESTS The principle components of G.O switches shall be Type Tested as per relevant clauses of IS-9921 (part-I to V) or latest version there of. Two sets of copies of Type Test certificates carried out only at CPRI, ERDA, NPL or any other Govt. of India approved lab / testing house shall be accepted. Further type tests carried out from the said testing houses on similar equipment, not earlier than 3 years on date of opening of bids shall be acceptable. Bids not accompanied with copies of Type Test certificates from CPRI, ERDA, NPL or any other Govt. of India approved lab / testing house, are liable to be rejected. The firm shall state the testing facilities available at their works. The following shall comprise type tests. (a) Tests to verify the insulation level, including withstand tests at powerfrequency voltage on auxiliary equipment. (b) Tests to prove that the temperature rise of any part does not exceed the limits. (c) Tests to prove the capability of the disconnector or earthing Switch to carry the rated peak withstand current and the rated short-time withstands current.
Page 102 of 291

(d) Tests to prove the short circuit making capacity of earthing switches. (e) Tests to prove satisfactory operation and mechanical endurance. 15. ROUTINE TESTS Routine tests as per latest edition of IS-9921 (part-I to V) shall be carried out at works of the manufacturer. The following shall comprise Routine tests:(a) (b) (c) Power frequency voltage dry test. Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit. Operating test. Copies of Routine test certificates shall be supplied along with the acceptance tests carried out in the presence of purchasers authorized representative. All tests reports shall be submitted and shall be got approved by the purchaser or his authorized representative before dispatch. INSPECTION Testing and inspection of material in accordance with the relevant ISS as mentioned in clause Applicable standards above and as per drawings approved by the purchaser, shall be carried out by the purchaser or his duly authorised representative at works of the manufacturers. The manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturers works to inspect and witness the tests of the equipment manufactured. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent Govt. agency, wherever there is a dispute regarding the quality of material supplied. Drawings The bidder shall submit two sets of detailed dimensional drawing indicating there in the material used for various components. Manufacture of material shall not be commenced before receipt of approved drawings from the purchaser. Material not complying with dimensional drawings shall be rejected. Guaranteed Technical Particulars Guaranteed Technical Particulars as detailed in Annexure I shall be submitted along with the Tender. Tenders with out accompanying GTPS shall not be accepted. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores OR 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period
Page 103 of 291

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time. CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed. This issues with the approval of Common Specifications Committee.

Page 104 of 291

Annexure-I
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11KV, 400 Amps G.O. SWITCHES G.O. SWITCHES:-

1. 2.

Name of manufacturer No. of breaks per pole.

Page 105 of 291

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

No. of poles Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated current Minimum short time current (KA for 1sec.) Max. temp. rise of contacts Material of moving contact Material of arcing horns Material and size of operation handle & rod Size of base channels Type of bearings. Minimum clearance between phases Minimum clearance between phases & earth. 1.2/50 microsecond Impulse withstand voltage i) ii) Across isolating distance Between poles and earth.
(B) POST INSULATORS

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

One minute power frequency withstand voltage Name of manufacturer Type of insulators Height of the insulator: Creepage distance (Min.) Weight of each unit Flash over voltage:
(i) Dry power frequency
Page 106 of 291

(ii) (iii)

Wet power frequency Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds(+ve)

(iv)

Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds(ve)

24.
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Withstand voltages
Power frequency one minute dry withstand voltage Power frequency one minute impulse wet withstand voltage Impulse withstand voltage micro seconds (+ve polarity) Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds (-ve polarity)

25. 26. 27.

Power frequency puncture withstand voltage of unit Cantilever strength upright position Cantilever strength in under hung position
Tensile strength

Page 107 of 291

UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No. CSC- 44 /DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 kV XLPE POWER CABLES OF VARIOUS SIZES 50, 95, 150, 185 & 300 mm2 (CROSS LINKED POLYTHELENE DRY/ GAS CURED)

Month Issue:

Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

Page 108 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 kV XLPE POWER CABLE (CROSS LINKED POLYTHELENE DRY / GAS CURED) 1. SCOPE: This Section of the Specification covers design, manufacturing, testing, packing, supply & delivery FOR destination of 11 kV XLPE Dry / gas cured insulated power cable of size 50, 95, 150, 185 & 300 mm2 for effectively earthed specification system. 2. STANDARDS: Unless respect 3. otherwise to IS: specified, 7098 the cable shall conform in all (Part-II)-1985, IS:8130-1984 and IEC-502

standards with latest amendment thereof. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The climatic conditions under which are cables shall satisfactorily are as follows 11. 12. 13. 14. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Daily max. ambient temperature Max. yearly weighed average 600C (-)50C 400C operate

ambient 320C

temperature 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) Avg. No. of Rainy days/year Avg. annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 Kg./m Sq.

Note: Moderately hot & humid tropical climate conductive to rust & fungus growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the atmosphere Heavy lightning also occurs during June to October.
Page 109 of 291

4. 4.1.

PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS: 11 kV (E) Grade XLPE, 3-Core, power cable shall be of high conductivity, stranded compacted, H.D. aluminum circular shaped conductor with XLPE (cross linked Poly Ethylene) Dry/ Gas cured insulation provided with shielding of extruded semi-conducting materials over conductor and XLPE insulation. Each insulated core shall have copper tape screen, laid together and provided with common covering of PVC Inner Sheath (Extruded). Overall galvanized steel strip arm our and PVC outer sheath shall be provided. The specification for manufacture of cable shall be conforming to IS: 7098 (Part-II) 1985 (latest edition) for 11KV (E), 3-phase, 50 Hz. Earthed systems.

4.2.

Outer

sheath

shall

be

designed

to

afford

high

degree

of

mechanical protection and shall also be heat, oil, chemical and weather resistant, Common acid, alkalis and sealing solution shall not have adverse effect on material of PVC sheath. 4.3. 4.4. Cable shall be suitable for laying in covered trenches and / or buried under-ground in outdoor. Cable Parameters : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) Voltage grade (Uo / U) Cores (Nos) Nominal system voltage kV Highest system voltage System frequency Variation in frequency (b) Maximum allowable temp. under short circuit condition (viii) 1.2/50 microsecond lightning impulse wave withstand voltage value. (ix) (x) 5 Min. Power frequency withstand voltage System earthling
Page 110 of 291

kV

: 6.35 / 11 : 3 : 11

kV Hz %

: 12 : 50 : 3

900C :

: 75KVp kV rms : 17 : Effectively earthed.

5. 5.1.

ENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: Conductor: The cable conductor shall be made from high conductivity stranded High Density aluminum to form compacted circular shaped conductor having resistance within limits specified in IS: 8130/1984 and any latest amendment to it.

5.2.

Conductor shield: The conductor having semi-conducing screen shall ensure perfectly smooth profile & avoid concentration of stress. The conductor screen shall be extruded in the same operation as the insulation. The semiconducting polymer shall be cross linked.

5.3.

Insulation: The XLPE insulation shall be suitable for 11 kV system voltage and should be manufactured with Dry /Gas curing process. The bidder shall submit the description of dry /gas curing clear inclusion of equipments process, with the / parameters involved. The

manufacturing process shall ensure that the insulation shall be free of voids. The insulation shall withstand mechanical and thermal stress under steady state and transient operating conditions. The extrusion method should give very smooth interface between semi-

conducting screen and insulation. The insulation of the cable shall be of high standard quality generally conforming to IS: 7098 (Part II) 1985 and any latest amendment to it. 5.4. Insulation shield: Non-metallic semi-conducting shield shall be provided over the insulation to confine electrical field to the insulation. The insulation shield shall be extruded in the same operation as the conductor shield and the insulation by suitable extrusion process. The XLPE insulation shield shall be of tended type. Copper metallic overlapped tape shield shall be provided. 5.5. Filler and Inner-Sheath: The sheath shall be suitable to withstand the site conditions and the desired temperature. It shall be of adequate thickness, consistent quality and free from all defects. The PVC sheath shall be extruded. The material of fillers and inner-sheath shall be compatible with the temperature ratings of the cable and shall have no deterious effect on any other component of the cable. Central PVC filler shall also, be
Page 111 of 291

provided section. 5.6. Armour:

with

other peripheral PVC fillers to have proper circular

Armoring of galvanized steel strip shall be provided. The dimensions of steel strips shall be as per latest edition of IS: 3975 1979. 5.7. Outer-Sheath: Extruded type ST-2 PVC outer-sheath, conforming to IS: 5831- (1984) (latest edition) over armoring with suitable additives (to prevent attack by rodents & termites), shall be provided. 5.8. Construction: have subsequently circular cross-section before the inner applied. the cable. 5.8.2. All materials used in manufacturing of cable shall be new, unused and of finest quality. All materials should comply with the requirements / tests as per applicable IS / IEC specification, Indian Electricity Rules and any other statutory provision of rules & regulations. 5.8.3. The PVC material used in the manufacture of cable shall be of reputed manufacturer. No recycled material PVC is permitted. The purchaser reserves the right to ask for documentary evidence of t h e purchase of v a r i o u s m a t e r i a l s , ( to be used for t h e manufacture of cable) as a part of quality control. Quality Assurance plan shall be submitted. 5.9. Current Rating: The indicative value of continuous current carrying capacity at Maximum conductor temperature of 90 0C (for design purpose by field ) of the various sizes of the cables is given below: Continuous Current Carrying Sr. No. Size of 3 Core Cable (Sq.mm) 1 2 3 4 5 50 95 150 185 300 Capacity in Amp (For 11 kV cable) IN Ground 130 185 235 270 340
Page 112 of 291

5.8.1. The cable shall have suitable PVC fillers laid up with insulation cores to sheath is The fillers shall be suitable for operating temperature of

In air 140 200 265 310 396

The bidder needs to confirm the guaranteed corresponding figures. 5.9.1. Short circuit ratings of various sizes of 3 core cable calculated for duration of one second at maximum temperature of 2500 C, are given below: Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5 Size of 3 Core Cable (Sq.mm) 50 95 150 185 300 Conductor short circuit rating in kA (rms) (For 11 kV cable) 4.70 8.93 14.1 17.4 28.2

The bidder needs to confirm the guaranteed corresponding figures. 5.9.2. The current rating
0

shall

be

based

on

maximum

conductor

temperature of 90

C with ambient site condition as specified herein.

Continuous rated current of cable supplied shall be clearly specified at ambient temp. of 20,30, 40, 50 & 60 0C. 5.9.3. Operation : 5.9.4. Cable shall be suitable for operation under frequency variation of 3% and voltage variation of +10% to -15% and combined frequency voltage variation of 10% (absolute sum). 5.9.5. Cable shall be suitable for laying in duct or buried underground. 5.9.6. Cable shall have heat & moisture resistance properties. These shall be of type & design with proven record on distribution network service. 5.9.7. Length : The cable shall be supplied in standard drum length of 300 mtrs. 5% tolerance for all the sizes of cable except for 3 C x 300 mm2 size cable. The drum length for 3C x 300 mm2 cable shall be 200 mtrs. 5%. Over all tolerance in total quantity of ordered cables shall be 2%. 5.9.8. Identification Mark : (i) The cable drum shall be printed with information as per cl. 21;2 of IS and ISI Certification mark. Bidder shall submit xerox copy of valid ISI Licenses with technical bid. (ii) For identification of cores, coloured strip of Red, Yellow and Blue colours shall be used for identification of phases. Following details of identification shall be embossed at intervals of length of one meter of cable outer sheath.
Page 113 of 291

(iii) 6. 6.1.

(a) Name of manufacturer (b) year of manufacture (c) voltage grade (d) Name of purchaser DHBVN (e) ISI certification mark. TESTS: (A) Type Tests: All the cable sizes i.e. items offered should have been fully type tested as per the relevant standards at any Govt. recognized Laboratory. The bidder shall furnish three sets of type test reports along with the offer. These type tests must have been conducted within last five years prior to date of Bid opening. For any change between design/type of already type tested and the design / type offered against this specification, the purchaser reserves the right to demand repetiton of type tests without any extra cost. The purchaser also reserves the right to have tests carried out at his own cost from an independent agency, whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply. (B) Type tests certificates for following type tests shall be furnished invariably with the offer: (a) (i) (ii) (iii) (b) (c) (d) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (e) (i) Tests on conductor : Tensile test Wrapping test Resistance test Tests for armouring strips / wires. : Tests for thickness of insulation and sheath. : Physical tests for insulation. : Tensile strength and elongation at break. Ageing in air oven Hot set Shrinkage test Water absorption Physical tests on outer seath : Tensile strength and elongation at break.
Page 114 of 291

(ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (f) (g) (h) i) ii) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) 6.2.

Ageing in air oven Shrinkage test Hot deformation Bleeding and blooming test Partial discharge test Bending test Dielectric power factor test as a function of voltage as a function of temperature Insulation resistance test (volume resistivity) Heating cycle test Impulse withstand test High voltage test Flammability test

Acceptance Test: 10% drums of each lot offered for inspection or part thereof. The minimum shall be one drum.

6.2.1. The selection of sample pieces for acceptance test shall be from

6.2.2. The following acceptance tests shall be carried as per IS: 7098 (Part-II) 1985 out on the selected samples. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) Annealing test (for copper) Tensile test (for aluminum) Wrapping test (for aluminum) Conductor resistance test. Test for thickness of insulation and sheath Hot set test for insulation Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and sheath. Partial discharge test (for screened cables only)
Page 115 of 291

(i) (j)

High voltage test for 4 hours (as per cl. No. 19.7.1) Insulation resistance (volume resistivity) test.

6.2.3. All the acceptance tests shall be carried out by the firm, in the presence of purchasers representative at their works. The firm shall give atleast 15 days advance notice to the purchaser to enable him to depute the engineer for witnessing the tests. The test approval before dispatch of material. 6.2.4. Tests: 6.2.4.1.1. The Inspector may inspect the following routine test for at the time of inspection . (a) (b) Conductor resistance test Partial discharge test certificates for acceptance tests witnessed by inspecting officer/ engineer shall be submitted for

(c) High-voltage test for 5 minutes [as per Clause 19.7.2 of IS: 7098 (Part-II) 1985]. 7. INSPECTION: manufacture. The successful bidder shall grant free access to the purchasers representative at reasonable time, when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance, of any cables under this with the specification specification by the purchaser, shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of supplying cable in accordance and shall not defective. 7.1.2. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the programme of manufacturing of cables so that arrangement can be made for inspection. 7.1.3. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance / routing tests of the bought out items. 7.1.4. The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection.
Page 116 of 291

7.1.1. The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of

prevent subsequent rejection, if the cables are found

7.1.5. At least 5% of total numbers of drums subject to minimum of 2 in each lot put up for inspection shall be selected at random to ascertain the length/workmanship of cable by the following method: At the work of the manufacture, the cable shall be transferred from one drum to another for checking any manufacturing defects in the cable drum selected for conducting acceptance tests, at the same time measuring its length with the help of pulley & cyclometer graduated in presence of inspector. The difference in the measured length thus obtained from the declared length by the supplier in the packing list shall be applied to all the drums if the cable is found short during checking the sample lot (s). 7.1.6. The supplier shall present the latest Calibration Certificate(s) of testing instruments/equipments to be used for the testing of the material covered in the Purchase Order to the authorized inspecting officer /inspecting agency of the purchaser. The testing instruments / meters /apparatus etc. should be got calibrated by the supplier from time to time from an independent testing laboratory / house having accreditation from National Accreditation Board for The testing valid and

calibrating laboratories for the testing equipment or from original manufacturers having trace ability to NABL /NPL. calibration certificate(s) should not in any case be older than one year at the time of presenting the same to the inspecting officer / inspecting agency of the purchaser. The testing instruments / equipment should be duly sealed by the Calibrating Agency and mention thereof shallbe indicated in the calibration certificate(s). 8. DOCUMENTATION: The bidder shall furnish following documents along with his offer. 8.1.1. Sectional sheath etc. 8.1.2. Drawing of cable drums with details of material dimension and paint etc. 8.1.3. All the required type test reports for offered items tested at any Government recognized Laboratory as stated under Clause No. 6.1 (B). 8.1.4. Literature, pamphlets for the supplied items. view, showing the General constructional feature with conductor / conductor screen / insulation / armoring / inner and outer

Page 117 of 291

9.

PACKING AND FORWARDING: and packed in drums suitable for vertical / horizontal transport, the case may be and shall be suitable as

9.1.1. The cable shall be wound on wooden drums as per IS: 10418 1972 to withstand rough

handling during transport and outer storage. The outer surface of the drum shall be painted with white aluminum pint. Similarly, the inside surface of drum shall have the protective layer of varnish / paint . 9.1.2. The wooden drums shall be reinforced with steel bends and strips for better protection. 9.1.3. The ends of the cable shall be sealed by means of nonhygroscopic sealing material. 9.1.4. The following information be stenciled on the drum with either water proof ink or oil paint: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vii. viii. ix. x. xi. xii. xiii xiv xv. Reference of IS / IEC standard. Manufacturers name or trademark. Type of cable and voltage grade. No. of cores. Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor. vi. Cable code. Length of cable on the drum No. of lengths on the drum (if more than one) Direction of rotation of drum (by means of an arrow) Position of outer end of cable Gross weight Year of manufacture Reference of Tender No. / P.O. No. date Property of __________. Name of consignee and the destination.

The drum may also be marked with ISI Certification Mark. 9.1.5. The firm shall be responsible for any damage to the cables during transit due to improper and inadequate packing. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks, shall be provided. Any cable found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by the supplier, without any extra cost. 9.1.6. Each consignment shall (a) (b) Name of consignee Details of consignment
Page 118 of 291

be accompanied

by

a detailed packing list,

containing the following information:

(c) (d) (e) (f) 10.

Destination Total weight of consignment Handling and unpacking instruction Bill of materials, indicating contents of each package.

TECHNICAL AND GUARANTEED PARTICULARS: The bidder shall furnish all Guaranteed Technical Particulars, as called for, in Appendix - I of this Specification. Particulars, which are subject to guarantee, shall be clearly identified. Offer not containing these information will not be considered for acceptance.

11.

Challenge Clause:The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to test for any parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs, the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.

12.

Warranty Period:The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days/ The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal
Page 119 of 291

handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time. The specification no. CSC-XIV/ DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 be hereby considered withdrawn.

Page 120 of 291

APPENDIX I

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11KV XLPE POWER CABLE

(To be filled in and signed by the Tenderer) 1.00.0 1.01.0 1.02.0 1.03.0 1.04.0 1.05.0 GENERAL: Name of Manufacturer Place of Manufacturing Applicable standard IS/IEC Design ambient temperature 0C Cable size(s) of cable offered mm 2 Note: (Fill up separate column for the following particulars for each type & size of cable) 2.00.0 2.01.0 2.02.0 2.03.0 2.04.0 2.05.0 2.05.1 CABLES: Voltage grade (Uo / U) : : : : : :

Whether suitable for neutral : earthed / unearthed System Permissible voltage & frequency : a) Voltage variation for satisfactory operation b) Frequency
c) Overall

Nos. of cores & size Continuous capacity 1) In air 2) In ground 3) In duct 4) In trench current

: carrying :

For standard condition as per IS (Amp.) ( ) ( ) ( ) : : : :

Page 121 of 291

2.05.2

For site condition 1) In air 2) In ground 3) In duct 4) In trench (Amp.) ( ) ( ) ( )

: : : : :

3.00.0 3.01.0 3.02.0 3.03.0 3.04.0 3.05.0

CONDUCTOR: Material & its applicable IS. Shape of conductor 2 Nominal cross section area (mm ) : : :

Number of wires per core : Nominal area of each wire used in each core of the conductor as a)Diameter mm b) Cross section mm 2 :

4.00.0 4.01.0 4.02.0 4.03.0 4.04.0 5.00.0 5.01.0 5.02.0

CONDUCTOR SCREENING: Type Material & its applicable IS. Max. working temp 0C Nominal thickness (mm) INSULATION: Material & its applicable IS Thickness of insulation (mm) a) Between cores b) Between cores & inner sheath : : : : : : :

5.03.0 5.04.0 5.05.0

Tolerance in thickness (percent) : of insulation Diameter of core over insulation : (mm) Specific (Ohm-Cm) resistance of insulation at : ninety (90) degree Centigrade

6.00.0

INSULATION SCREENING:
Page 122 of 291

6.01.0

Material & its applicable IS.

6.02.0

Thickness (mm): 1) Semi-conducting part 2) Metallic part (copper tape) : :

6.03.0 6.04.0

Whether overlapping provided for : copper tape Current carrying capacity a) Continuous (Amps.) (KA) c) S.C. current duration / sec.(kA) : : :

b) S.C. current duration of 3-Sec. :

6.05.0 6.06.0 7.00.0 7.01.0 7.02.0 7.03.0 8.00.0 8.01.0 8.02.0 8.03.0 8.04.0 9.00.0 9.01.0 9.02.0

Diameter of core over screening : (mm) Whether FILLER: Material & its applicable IS Whether suitable for Operating temperature of Cable No of fillers provided including central filler INNER SHEATH: Material & its applicable IS Extruded or wrapped Thickness (mm) sheath (mm) ARMOURING: Material & its applicable IS Type of armouring
Page 123 of 291

insulation

screen

is :

removable without the application of heat

: : : Yes/ No

: : :

Diameter of cable over inner- :

: :

9.04.0 9.05.0 9.06.0

Nos. of strips Diameter of cable over armouring Current armour a) on continuous basis (Amp) b) short circuit current duration of 1 sec (KA) carrying capacity

: : of :

10.00.0 10.01.0 10.02.0 10.03.0 10.04.0 10.05.0 11.00.0 11.01.0

OUTER SHEATH: Material & its applicable IS. Thickness of sheath Tolerance on thickness of sheath Over all diameter of cable (mm) Scheme for identification CABLE CONSTANT: AC resistance per core at : operating temp. (Ohm/KM) : : : : :

11.02.0 11.03.0 11.04.0

DC resistance per core at 200C : (Ohm/KM) Reactance per core (Ohm/KM) Capacitance (Microfarad/ KM) per :

core :

11.05.0 11.06.0 11.07.0 11.08.0

Insulation (Ohm/ KM)

resistance

at

270C : : :

Loss tangent Dielectric constant normal (Amp/KM)

Page 124 of 291

Maxi. Cable charging current at : rated voltage

12.00.0 12.01.0 12.02.0 12.03.0 13.00.0 13.01.0 13.02.0 13.03.0 13.04.0 13.05.0 14.00.0

OTHER PARAMETERS: Recommended minimum braiding radius (mm) Safe pulling force Cable weight (Kg./KM) CABLE DRUM: Net weight of cable (Kg.) Drum weight (Kg.) Shipping weight (Kg.) Whether ISI Mark shall indicated on drum (Yes/No) Length of cable per drum (Meter) Whether details shall embossed as stated under Cl. 1.9.4 of Technical Specification (Yes/No) : be : : : be : : : : :

15.00.0

Whether

type

test

reports :

submitted, as stated under Cl. 6.1 of Technical Specification (Yes/ No) 16.00.0 Whether drawings submitted as : specified 17.00.0 under Cl. 8.1.1 & 8.1.2 of . Technical Specification. (Yes/ No) Whether unpriced schedule of : offered items submitted with Technical offer. (Yes/ No)

_______________ SEAL OF FIRM

________________________ SIGNATURE OF TENDERER

Page 125 of 291

TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTOR.

Page 126 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTER FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 KA, SERIES B.
1. SCOPE : This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at manufacturers works & delivery of 11 KV lightning arrestors.

2.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS : The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant IEC standards with latest amendments thereof. The bidder shall use ISS where corresponding IEC is not available. However, where both the standards are available, IEC will be used. IEC or other National Standards are permitted where these are equivalent or superior to IEC. In such cases salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the IEC standards shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule Four copies of such standards with authentic English translation shall be finished alongwith the offer.

3.

CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions : TEMPERATURE : A) B) Maximum temperature of air Minimum temperature of air 50 Degree C -2.5 Degree C.

RELATIVE HUMIDITY : A) B) Maximum Minimum Isoceraunic Level

Page 127 of 291

100% 26% 45

Average rainfall per year Altitude Maximum wind pressure No. of rainy days per year

900 mm Below 1000 M. Above sea level. 150 Kg./Sq.m. Nearly 4 months In a year.

4.

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : The Lightning Arrestors shall be of Metal Oxide Gapless type suitable for outdoor installation on 11000 volts, 50 cycles per ;second, 3 phase A.C. system with neutral solidly grounded. The highest line to line system voltage should be 12.0 KV (rms) and other particulars are as under : A) B) C) Voltage rating in KV RMS Nominal discharge current rating Maximum residual test voltage specified 9 KV rms. 5 KVA. 34 KV peak with 8/20 micro second current waves.

5.

DRAWINGS : The tendered along with tender, should offer dimensional drawings and illustrated descriptive literature of the equipment.

6.

TESTS : The type routine and acceptance as per IS : 3010 (Part-III)/IEC Ch-4 (1991) with latest version thereof shall be carried out.

7.

INSPECTION :
Page 128 of 291

The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary facilities for such inspection. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these test carried out at his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt. recognized testing agency at his own expense.

8.

TEST CERTIFICATES : The supplier shall supply certificates as per IS 3070/99 4 with latest amendment thereof from a recognized Government agency for approval of the purchaser.

9.

MARKING : Each lightning arrestor shall be provided with a name plate or plae legibly and indelibly marked with the name or trade mark of the manufacturer and country of Manufacture rated voltage, nominal discharge current, type destination and serial number of the Lightning Arrestor, identification mark on each separately housed unit to enable it to be replaced in correct position after a multi unit arrestor has been dismantled should also be marked ISI certification mark may also be marked.

10.

GUARANTEED & TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : The ;tenderers shall supply the relevant information and technical particulars called for in the schedule of guaranteed and technical particulars as per Annexure A.

11.

QUALITY ASSURANCE : To ensure that the goods/equipment under the scope of this contract whether manufactured at the bidders works or at its sub-contractors premises or at any other place of work are manufactured following Quality Assurance
Page 129 of 291

Program.

Such programs shall be outlined by the bidder and shall be

submitted along with the bid. A quality assurance program of the bidder submitted by the bidder must cover the following. 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 The bidders organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality assurance program. Documentation control system. Qualification data of key personnel. The procedure for purchase of material parts, components and selection of sub-contractor including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw materials inspection, verification of materials purchased etc. 11.5 11.6 A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopted or controlling the quality of equipment during manufacturing. System of quality audits.

12.

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM : The quality assurance program shall be discussed with the successful bidder after the award of the contract and the final version mutually agreed between the purchaser and the bidder shall form a part of the Contract Agreement signed between the purchaser and the bidder.

Page 130 of 291

ANNEXURE A

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Rated Lightning Arresters Voltage. Rated Lightning Arresters Current. Maximum continuous operating voltage. Maximum residual voltage with 8/20 microsecond wave at 2.5 KA 5.0 KA 10.0 KA

1. 2. 3.

High current short duration withstand current ( .4/10 microsecond wave) Maximum energy discharge capability. Maximum steep current impulse Residual Voltage at 5 KA discharge current.

4.

One minute power frequency withstand voltage for arrester housing. a. b. Dry Wet

5. 6.

Total creepage distance of arrester. Temporary over voltage withstand capability. 0.1 second. 1.0 second. 10.0 second.

Page 131 of 291

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Office of the Chief General Manager/P&D,
Vidyut Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, Hisar-125005
Tel: 01662-221285, 221830 (GM/P&D) Fax: 01662-220481

Technical Specification For GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE

Chief General Manager / P&D, DHBVN, Hisar Issue of the Month:

Page 132 of 291

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE 1. SCOPE: This Specification covers the manufacture, testing & inspecting of galvanised steel barbed wire (glidden type) formed with 2 line wires twisted together, one containing the barbs. APPLICABLE STANDARD: Except when they conflict with the specific requirements in this specification, the conductors shall comply in all respect with the Indian standard specification No. IS: 278 (1978) & 4826 (1979) or the latest version thereof. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The Barbed wire is required to work satisfactorily under the following climatic conditions:3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 Max. temperature Min. temperature Max. relative humidity Min. relative humidity Average number of rainy days Nearly Average annual rain fall Average number of dust storms days per annum Isoceraunic level Max. wind pressure; Altitude above mean sea level less than 50 C - 2.5 C 100% 26% Nearly 120 days. 900 mm 35 45 195 Kg/ Sq meter. Less than 1000 Mtrs.
0 0

2.

3.

4. TECHNICAL PARTICULAR: (i) Nominal dia meter of line wire: (ii) (iii) (iv) Nominal dia meter of point wire: Nominal distane between two barbs: Weight of completed barbed wire:

2.24 mm + 0.08 mm 2.00 mm + 0.08 mm 75 mm + 12 mm Max. 106 g/M Min. 97 g/m

(v) (vi) 5.

Tensile strength of wire Minimum breaking load of completed Barbed wire

40 to 60 Kg f/mm 300 Kgf.

TESTS: The tests as per IS:278/1978 including the tests for chemical analysis provided therein shall be carried out. The uniformity of zinc coating shae 11e ofe46t6 as specified in IS: 4826-1979. Pag ll b 9 t s ed

6.

TEST CERTIFICATE: The supplier shall supply one set of certificates from recognized govt. agency in respect of quality as per IS: 278-1979 with latest amendments for approval of the purchaser. MARKING: Each coil of barbed wire shall be legibly marked with the name of the manufacturer, the type of the barbed wire, the diameter of the line & point wire/barb spacing and length & weight of the coil. Barbed wire may also be marked with IST certification mark. INSPECTION: All tests & inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector /representing of the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturers works to inspect & witness tests of the conductor being manufactured. As regards correctness of the length of galvanized steel barbed wire, the same is subject final checking and measurement by the consignee & the firm shall be responsible for all shortages, damages etc, if any. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: Guaranteed technical particulars of the barbed wire should be given in the Annexure A attached herewith the specification. Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be given in addition to these listed in the Annexure. PACKING & WEIGHT OF COIL: The barbed wire shall be supply in coils weighting 15 Kgs to 30 Kgs. ********

7.

8.

9.

10.

Page 120 of 466

Annexure A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Code word. Makers name address & country Nominal dia meter of line wire Nominal distance between two barbs: Tensile strength of wire. Minimum breaking load of barbed wire. Weight of complete barbed wire. Nominal dia meter of point wire. Standard length. Tolerance, if any. Standard to which confirm. i) Galvanising. ii) Barbed wire. 12. Other particulars, if any.

Page 121 of 466

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM LIMITED

Specification No. S-81/DD-116

11 KV, 12 PANEL BOARD VACUUM TYPE SWITCHGEAR (1250A)

Chief Engineer/PD&C., DHBVN, Hisar.

Issue of Month : June, 06.

Page 122 of 466

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV SWITCHGEAR PANELS VACUUM TYPE (1250A) 1.0 SCOPE :

This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturers works before dispatch, supply and delivery F.O.R. destination as per schedule of requirement (Annexure I) of Vacuum Type, 12 Panel 11 KV Switch boards having normal current rating of 1250 Amps. with rupturing capacity of 350 MVA.
2.0 2.1 STANDARDS : The circuit breakers shall conform to the latest revisions with amendments available at the time of testing of relevant standards, rules and codes, some of which are listed herein for ready reference. Sr. STANDARD No. 1. IEC-56 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. IS-5578 & 11333 IS-2147 IS-13118 IS-3427 IS-2090

TITLE
Specification for alternating current circuit breakers. Making and arrangement for switch gear bus-bar main connection and auxiliary wiring. Degree of protection provide for enclosures for low voltage switch gear. Specification for circuit breaker & their interlocking. Disconnectors of circuit breaker & their interlocking. High voltage porcelain bushings.

2.2

Equipment meeting with the requirement of any other authoritative standards, which ensure equal or better quality than the standard mentioned above shall also be acceptable. If the equipment offered by the bidders conforms to any other standards, salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic English Translations shall be furnished alongwith the offer.
Page 123 of 466

3.0

CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions :

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11

Max. temperature Min. Temperature Max. relative humidity Min. relative humidity Average number of rainy days per annum. Average annual rainfall Average number of dust storm days per annum. Isoceraunic level Max. wind pressure Altitude above mean sea level AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY :

500C -2.50C 100% 26% Nearly 120 days 900mm 35 45 195 kg/Sq.mt. Less than1000mts.

Auxiliary electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation on the following supply system. a) b) c) 4.0 Power devices DC alarm, control and protective devices lighting TYPE & RATING : The panels 11 KV switchgear panels shall comprise of 11 KV Vacuum Type circuit breakers, instrument panels and instrument transformers etc. suitable for indoor use. The equipment shall be totally enclosed in a metal clad cubicle, dust and vermin proof with necessary isolation arrangement. Each panel shall be easily extensible on either side and should be complete with necessary internal copper connections, small wiring, L.T. fuses and supporting frame work with bolts to secure it to the floor. The maximum permissible width of each panel
Page 124 of 466

415 V, 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz, neutral (like drive motors) grounded AC supply. i) 220 V DC, underground 2 wire for 220 KV 132 KV & 66 KV Sub Station. 240 V, single phase, 50 Hz AC ;supply.

should not be greater than 710mm. The Circuit Breakers shall be draw out type in horizontal position and horizontal isolation.

Principal parameters The breakers shall have the following ratings : 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 Type No. of Poles Nominal system voltage Highest system voltage Rated frequency Rated continuous current rating at an ambient temp. as specified in IS : 13118-1991 (Latest edition) Symmetrical breaking capacity. Impulse withstand test voltage One minute power frequency withstand test voltage Short time current rating System neutral Vacuum 3 11 KV 12 KV 50 +/- 1.5 Hz 1250 Amp for incoming & 400 Amp for outgoing feeders.

4.7 4.8 4.9

350 MVA 75 kV (Peak) 28 kV (rms)

4.10 4.11 5.0 5.1

Not less than 18.4 kA current corresponding to 350 MVA for 1 sec. Solidly earthed.

GENERAL DESIGN OF SWITCHGEAR PANELS : OPERATING MECHANISM : The vacuum type circuit breaker shall be draw out type & trip free. The VCBs shall be suitable for operation from 220 V DC auxiliary supply. The operating mechanism shall be motor operated spring charged type.
Page 125 of 466

There shall be provision(s) for manual charging of closing spring and emergency hand trip. The motor used for the purpose will be suitable for 240 V AC as well as for 220 V DC. The operating mechanism shall work satisfactorily at 85% - 110% of rated supply voltage. The VCB shall have 2 normally open & 2 normally-closed auxiliary contracts over & above the ones required for various control & supervision circuits. 5.2 INSTRUMENT PANELS : Each unit shall have its own instrument panel provided at the top & complete with small wiring connections from relays, instrument transformers, metering instruments, indicating instruments, selector switches & circuit breaker control switch. All wiring shall be carried out by using stranded single annealed copper conductor insulated with poly vinyl chloride insulation suitable for 650 V service and in accordance with IS: 732-1963. CT/PT circuit shall use wire of not less than 4.0 mm2 cross-sectional area whereas control/alarm/supervision circuit shall use wire of not less than 2.5 mm2 cross-sectional area. All wires will be continuous from one terminal to the other and, also will have no Tee-junction enroute. The connections shall be securely made with the help of connecting lugs duly crimped on to the copper conductor. The meters and relays shall be mounted in a convenient position so as to be readily accessible for inspection or repair. The terminal board provided in the instrument panel of VCBs will be made of moulded dielectric having brass studs, washers, holding nuts & locking nuts. All holding nuts shall be secured by locking nuts. The connection studs shall project 6 mm from the lock nut surface. NO OTHER TYPE OF TERMINAL BOARD IS ACCEPTABLE. The panels shall have a degree of protection of IP-4x. The leads from metering CTs shall be directly terminated at TTB & there from at the KWH meter with a ;provision to seal TTB and KWH meter. The said CT leads will be concealed to prevent their tempering enroute. Similarly PT leads from secondary box of the PT to TTB & there from to energy meter including inter panel PT leads will also be concealed to prevent their tempering. The mode & extent of concealing the metering leads of CTs & PTs to prevent their tempering (by unscrupulous operating personnel) will be discussed & mutually agreed upon with the successful bidder (s). TTB used on the instrument panel should be suitable for front connections. Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the relays/switches mounted on the instrument panel and metal enclosed switchgear shall be done by a suitably sized copper conductor. Earth bus made of 25x3 mm bare copper flat will be extended through entire length of 11 kV switch-board with suitable provision to connect it to the
Page 126 of 466

sub-station earth at the extremities. The earthing arrangement will meet with the requirements laid down in IS : 3427 read with its latest amendment.

5.3

VACUUM INTERRUPTER : The Vacuum interrupter of 12 KV minimum 25 kA short time current rating, 2000 Amp. normal current rating capable of withstanding minimum 100 full short circuit operations as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56. Vacuum Interrupters for incomers as well as outgoing shall be of same type. These vacuum interrupters shall bear warranty for 5 years of free replacement from the date of commissioning and shall be of approved make only.

5.4

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER : The secondary voltage & current rating of the instrument transformers shall match with the metering or protective equipment. The CTs shall have ratio & accuracy class as mentioned in the schedule of requirement. The CTs shall be wound/ring type in accordance with their ratings. The terminal boards associated with differential CTs, REF CTs & over current / earth fault protection CTs will be of disconnecting type having short circuiting facility & thus facilitate secondary testing of concerned protective relay without disturbing the associated small wiring. Interchangeability of housing of CTs from one panel to another must be ensured. A resin cast potential transformer of ratio (11000/3)/(110/3) volts having 100 VA output per phase with accuracy class 1.0 as per ISS : 3156 (PartII) 1965 shall be provided on the incoming side of each panel set and shall be star/star connected. The neutral point of star connected secondary windings of instrument transformers shall be earthed to the main earth bus referred to in the concluding paragraph of clause 5.2. Multiple earthing of any instrument transformers shall be avoided.

5.5

BUS BARS :

Page 127 of 466

All the panels shall be provided with one set of 3 phase 1250 Amps. heat shrunk PVC sleeves insulated Main electrolytic copper bus bars for all switchboards and shall be connected in a separate moisture and vermin proof sheet metal chamber. The cross sectional area of bus bar should however not be less than 1200 mm2 per phase. The bus-bars connections & insulator supports shall be mechanically strung & rigidly supported so as to withstand the stresses generated by vibrations, variations in temperature and due to severe short circuits.

The bus bars shall be heat shrunk PVC sleeves insulated type and supported on insulators at short intervals keeping adequate clearance as per IE rules between bus bars and earth. However, the minimum clearance between phases and phase to earth should not be less than 95mm. The bus bar chamber shall be provided with inspection covers with gaskets and bus bar shutters. Provision shall be made for future extension of bus bar & switch board.
5.6 LIMIT OF TEMPERATURE RISE : The temperature rise of the current carrying parts shall not exceed the permissible limits above the ambient temperature as per relevant standards (latest edition). However, the reference maximum ambient temperature may be taken as 450 C. 5.7 BUSHING INSULATORS : These shall comply with the latest issue of IS : 2099 in all respects. 5.8 DISCONNECTORS OF CIRCUIT BREAKER & THEIR INTERLOCKS All disconnectors (isolators) of the 11 KV VCBs & interlocks between different pieces of apparatus provided for reasons of safety & for convenience of operation of switchgear shall meet with the requirement of IS : 3427-1969 read with its latest amendment. Efficient mechanical interlocking shall be provided to meet the following conditions. i) ii) iii) iv) It shall be possible to insert/withdraw the breaker only after circuit breaker has been opened. It shall be possible to insert/withdraw the breaker only when it is fully open position as well as it is in Isolated/test position. It shall not be possible to remove the breaker until the moveable plug unit having secondary connections has been withdrawn. It shall not be possible to replace in position moveable plug unit unless the circuit breaker has been racked in.
Page 128 of 466

v) vi)

Provision of shutters or locks shall be made to prevent access to bus bar chambers and receptacles when the circuit breaker is withdrawn. Provision shall be made for locking the circuit breaker closing mechanism in open position.

5.9

CABLE BOXES : Each 11 KV incoming VCB shall be provided with cable termination arrangement suitable for receiving 2 sets of cable each comprising 3 Nos. 630 mm2, 11 KV single core XLPE, outer PVC sheathed cables. However, cable boxes complete with jointing kits & sealing material suitable for receiving 1 set of cable each comprising 3 Nos. 630 mm2, 11 KV single core XLPE, outer PVC sheathed cables shall be supplied for each incomer. The 11 KV capacitor controlling VCB shall be provided with cable boxes suitable to receive 2 sets of 3 core, 11 KV XLPE PVC Sheathed cables of size upto 185mm2 (Panel with CT ratio 300-150-75/5 A). The 11 KV station transformer VCB shall be provided with cable boxes suitable to receive 3 core, 11 KV, XLPE cables of size upto 50 mm2 (Panel with CT ration 60-30/5 A). Each cable box shall have vertical entry from below. These cable boxes shall be complete in all respects including cable glands of requisite size. The cable boxes should only be either heat shrinkable or push on type. The cable boxes for outgoing panels are not in the scope of this specifications.

5.9 A

EARTHING TRUCK One No. earthing trolley should be provided for each incomer panel. Earthing trolley must be full fault make type device which is capable of making fault at 46.2 KA (peak) and carry 18.4 KA for one second. The earthing truck for incoming panel must be so designed that it is impossible to earth a live circuit. However, manufacturers offering this a standard inbuilt feature of Breaker Trolley is also acceptable.

5.10 5.10.1

SUPERVISION SCHEME : Instrument panels on each of the 11 KV VCB covered by this specification shall be provided with the following indicating lamps/relay :Circuit breaker open Circuit breaker close
Page 129 of 466

Green Red

Auto trip Circuit breaker spring charged

White Blue

For monitoring of trip circuit both in pre-close and post-close position of the circuit breaker, 1 no. automatic trip circuit supervision relay will be provided on each of the 11 KV (incoming) instrument panel. In case of trip circuit becoming faulty, the operation of this relay shall be accompanied by visual and audio annunciation in accordance with clause 5.10.1 of the specification.

However, the trip circuit of each of the 11 KV outgoing / capacitor / Stn. VCB will be monitored on demand with the help of an indicating lamp & a push button both when the VCB is open & closed. The lamp will be amber coloured. Circuit breaker close & open lamps will be wired so as to be on 240 V AC under normal condition. These lamps will be switched over to 220 V DC automatically in the event of failure of 240 V AC supply. Each of 11 KV (incoming) instrument panel will be equipped with a suitable relay for the purpose. 5.11 5.11.1 ALARM SCHEME : NON TRIP ALARM SCHEME : Each of 11 KV (incoming) panel will be provided with a non-trip alarm scheme comprising suitable auxiliary relay (rated for 220 V DC), accept push button, reset push button & a buzzer. It will cater to non-trip condition such as trip circuit faulty & PT secondary fuses blow off. The non-trip alarm scheme will meet with the following requirements :i) The closing of an initiating contact shall actuate a buzzer and will be accompanied lby a flag indicating on the concerned auxiliary relay. The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp which will not reset until the fault has cleared. It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing accept push button. If after cancelling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same fault persists the buzzer shall be suppressed.

ii) iii)

Page 130 of 466

iv)

If after canceling the alarm but before resetting visual signal some other fault takes place, the alarm accompanied by flag indication on appropriate auxiliary relay shall take place. If after canceling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the same fault appears or some other fault take place, the alarm, flag indication and non-trip lamp indication shall reappear as usual. The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of a push button and resetting of visual signal may also preferably be done through a push button. Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit at frequent intervals. The equipment shall be suitable for 220 Volts DC operations.

v)

vi)

vii) viii) 5.11.2

TRIP ALARM SCHEME : Trip commands due to operation of protective relay on any of 11 KV VCB constituting the switchboard will trip the concerned VCB. Its auxiliary contact will actuate a bell (provided in each of the 11 KV incoming VCB) & will be cancelled by the associated circuit breaker control handle. Auto trip lamp will glow on the concerned 11 KV VCB & there will be flag indication on the concerned protective relay.

5.12

PT FUSE FAIL ALARM SCHEME : Each of the 11 KV (incoming) instrument panel is to be provided with a relay to monitor the fuses on the secondary side of 11 KV metering PT. The failure of any of secondary fuse on the 11 KV PT will be accompanied by visual & audio indication in accordance with clause 5.10.1 of the specification. None of the 11 KV outgoing/capacitor/Stn. VCB will be provided with fuses & inter-circuit PT leads may run from one bus wire board to the other.

5.13 5.13.1

METERING SCHEME : Each of the 11 KV VCB will be provided with a suitably sealed ammeter (additional dials, if any, required to cover all the taps of the CTs shall be included at the time of bidding) with a selector switch facilitating measurement of phase currents as well as unbalance current. The coil of ammeter shall be rated for 5 Amp. The instrument shall be of moving iron spring controlled type of industrial grade A classification having accuracy class 1.0 & shall conform to IS : 1248 (1968). Each of the 11 KV (incoming) VCB will be provided with a suitably sealed voltmeter with a selector switch. The selector switch shall facilitate the
Page 131 of 466

5.13.2

measurement of phase to phase & phase to neutral voltage of all the three phases one by one. The coil of the voltmeter shall be rated for 110 V (phase to phase). The instrument shall be of moving iron spring controlled type of industrial grade A classification with accuracy class 1.0 & shall conform to IS : 1248 (1968). 5.13.3 Each of the 11 KV VCB except the 11 KV capacitor VCB will be equipped with a three-phase four-wire Electronic KWH meter. The KWH meter shall be rated for 5 A CT secondary and 110 V/3 (phase to neutral) available from 11 KV PT mounted on each of the incoming VCB. The instrument shall be having accuracy class 1.0 and digital LED display only. Each of the 11 KV (incoming) VCB will be provided with a power factor meter. The PF meter having a range of 0.5Lag one 0.5 lead shall be of 2 element type suitable for use on three phase three wire unbalanced system. It shall be rated for 5 A CT secondary & 110 V (phase to phase) available from 11 KV PT mounted on each of the 11 KV incoming VCB. The instrument shall be iron-cored dynamometer type having accuracy class 1.0. Routine test certificates of all the indicating & integrating instruments will be submitted alongwith the routine test certificates of 11 KV switchgear. CONTROL SCHEME : The instrument panel of each of the 11 KV VCB will be equipped with a circuit breaker control handle of pistol grip type with spring return to neutral position and having bell alarm cancellation contracts. The control handle shall be so designed that after being operated to close a VCB the operation can not be repeated until the control handle has been turned to trip position making it impossible to perform two closing operation consecutively. The rating of the control handle shall be suitable for the duty imposed by the closing and opening mechanism of VCB. The moving and fixed contacts shall be of such a shape & material to ensure good contact and long life under service operating duty. All contacts shall be readily renewable. The number of contacts in the control handle will be decided by the bidder keeping in view the requirements of this specification. Two pairs of contacts shall be kept spare. The total number of contacts proposed to be provided shall be stated in the bid.
Page 132 of 466

5.13.4

N.B. 5.14 5.14.1

5.14.2

5.14.3

5.14.4

Safety against inadvertent operation due to light touch on the control handle shall be ensured. PROTECTION SCHEME : FOR INCOMING PANELS : Each incoming instrument panel shall be provided with a single pole restricted earth fault relay suitable for 5 A CT (Secondary) with a setting range of 10 % to 40 % of 5 Amp. (Strictly in steps of 5%). In case, the bidder offers voltage-operated REF relay, the same shall be technically justified with aid of sample calculations which will also form a part of the instruction manual for the said relay. The relay shall be housed in draw out flush mounting case. The back up protection shall be in the form of a combined over current and earth fault relay (two over current and one earth fault). This shall be triple pole having inverse. Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) characteristics with a 3/10 time current curve i.e. the relay operating time shall be 3 second at 10 times the plug setting at TMS 1. The outer element of the relay shall be arranged for over current protection and shall have a setting range of 50-200 % of 5 A (The relay for station transformer shall have a setting range of 20-80 % of 5 A) and adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug board. The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of 2080 % of 5 A adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug board (for station transformer panels, the setting range shall be 10-40% of 5 A ). Each of the three elements shall be fitted with shunt reinforcing unit with hand reset operation indicator.

5.15 5.15.1

5.15.2

FOR OUTGOING FEEDERS PANELS :

Each outgoing feeder panel shall be provided with a triple pole IDMTL type combined over current and earth fault relay (two over current and one earth fault element) conforming to the technical specification stated in the clause : 5.15.1 above and one set of triple pole instantaneous relay (high set element) in the form of two over current and one earth fault element. The outer element of the relay shall be arranged for over current protection and shall have a setting range of 500-2000 % of 5 A (The relay for station transformer shall have a setting range of 200-800 % of 5 A) and adjustable in suitable steps. The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of 200-800 % of 5 A (The relay for station transformer shall have setting range of 100-400 % of 5 A) adjustable in suitable steps.
Page 133 of 466

The relay shall have low transient over reach with a high pick-up/drop of ratio. The relay will be connected in series with the triple pole combined overcurrent and earth fault relay referred to above and shall be so wired so as to take this (instantaneous) out, if so desired by the purchaser at any time during operation of the equipment.
5.15.3 FOR CAPACITOR PANEL :

Each capacitor panel shall be provided with the following relays for protection of capacitor banks :i) Triple pole non-directional IDMTL type combined over current & earth fault relay (two over current & one earth fault element) conforming to the technical specification stated in clause 5.15.1 above. 1 No. inverse time over voltage relay with setting range 100 % to 130 % of 110 V available from 11 KV PT mounted in the 11 KV (incoming) VCB alongwith auxiliary transformers (for external mounting of ratio 110/103.5 to 116.5 V (in steps of one volt) to be used for compensating the error of over voltage relay. 1 No. inverse time under voltage relay with setting range of 50% to 90% of 110 V (phase to phase connections). 1 No. neutral displacement relay with settings 5.4, 7.5, 12.5 & 20 volts and to be fed from open delta winding of three phase (11000/3/(110/3) Volts. Residual voltage transformer (Residual voltage transformer is not a part of this specification). The bidders offering relays with different settings than above shall technically justify their offer. 5 minute timer to ensure that the capacitor bank is fully discharged once it has been switched OFF before it can be switched ON again.

ii)

iii) iv)

v)

N.B.

All protective relays covered by the specification shall be of electromechanical, draw out type mounted on the front of each instrument panel in a flush pattern case. The relay shall conform to IS: 3231 (latest edition) and will be suitable for 220 V, DC auxiliary supply. The relay cover & case shall be dust proof, water proof & vermin proof. Operating indicators shall be provided on all protective relays/ on their immediate auxiliary units to indicate the type of fault & phase / phases involved. It shall be possible to reset the operation indication without opening the relay case. The routine test certificates of all protective & auxiliary relays
Page 134 of 466

will be submitted alongwith routine test certificates of 11 KV switchgear covered by the specification. 5.16 D.C. FAIL ALARM SCHEME : A suitable relay for monitoring the DC supply to the 11 KV switchboard shall be mounted on each of the 11 KV incoming instrument panel. The operation of DC fail scheme shall be accompanied by visual (indicating lamp on the instrument panel) & audio (ringing of hooter) annunciation. It shall be possible to silence the hooter by pressing the accept push button while the lamp shall continue to glow till the fault has been attended to & DC supply restored. A DC fail Test push button may be provided to test the lamp circuit of the scheme. 6.0 TEST : All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS : 13118-1991 (latest edition thereof). 6.1 TYPE TESTS :

The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening, in respect of the following tests, carried out in accordance with ISS-13118/IEC-56, from Govt./ Govt. approved test house, shall be submitted along with bid :
i) ii) iii) iv) v) Impulse with-stand voltage tests. Power frequency voltage dry & wet tests on main circuits. Short circuit with stand capability tests. Mechanical endurance tests. Temperature rise test.

However, Mechanical endurance tests and Temperature rise test conducted at Firms works in the presence of representative of any of the SEBs/State Power Utilities shall also be acceptable. The remaining type test report as per clause 6.0 of ISS-13118/IEC-56 shall be submitted by the successful bidder with in three months from the date of placement of Purchase Order. These type test reports will also be from Govt. / Govt. approved test house & shall not be more than seven years old reckoned from the date of placement of order.
Page 135 of 466

Voltage transformers & current transformers shall comply with the type tests as stipulated in the latest version of IS : 3156 & IS : 2705 respectively. The reports of all type tests conducted shall be supplied. The 11 KV VCB & associated CTs & PTs shall be subjected to routine tests as specified kin the latest version of the relevant ISS in the presence of purchasers representative, if so desired by the purchaser. The routine test certificates of bought out components such as relays, switches, indicating instruments & KWH Meter will also be presented to HVPNLs inspecting officer who will forward them to the purchaser alongwith his inspection report for the main equipment. All test reports should be got approved from the purchaser before despatch of equipment. 7.0 DRAWINGS : In addition to any other drawing which the tenderer may like to furnish to explain the merits of his proposal, following drawings shall be submitted with the tender in quadruplicate : i) ii) Principal dimensional details of 11 KV Switchgear. General arrangement of 12/14 Panel 11 KV switchboard including its foundation details. Schematic drawings of control, metering & protection circuits in respect of 11 KV incoming VCB, 11 KV outgoing VCB including station transformer VCB & 11 KV capacitor VCB alongwith detailed write-up. Drawing showing height of 11 KV bus bars & arrangement of bus bars. Vacuum interrupter drawing.

iii)

iv)

v)

Four copies of the descriptive literature in respect of 11 KV switchgear, relays, KWH meters, voltmeters, ammeters, selector switches etc. proposed to be used shall also be supplied. The successful bidder shall submit within four weeks the above drawings in quadruplicate on A-3 size paper to the C.E./Design & Procurement, Sub-Station Design Directorate, HVPNL, Power Colony, Panchkula for approval. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on/to the drawings to the successful bidder within a period of four weeks. The supplier shall, if necessary, modify the drawings & resubmit four copies of
Page 136 of 466

the modified drawings for purchasers approval within two weeks the date of receipt of

from

Purchasers comments. The modified drawings will be approved within 15 days of their receipt by the purchaser. After receipt of purchasers approval to drawings, a set of reproducibles of approved drawings & five sets of all the approved drawings and operating manuals containing, erection, operation & maintenance instructions per 11 KV switchboard shall be supplied to CE/D&P, S/Stn. Design Dte., HVPNL, Power Colony, Panchkula for use by various agencies of the purchaser. However, one set of drawings and operating manual will be despatched alongwith each 11 KV switch board. The 11 KV switchgear will not be fabricated without getting the drawings approved from the purchaser. In order to ensure timely receipt of all the drawings, literature & reproducibles etc., the purchase section of D&P organization will issue despatch instruction for dispatch of 11 KV switchgear.

8.0

SPECIAL TOOLS : The tenderer shall separately quote for a set of special tools, if so required, for erection and maintenance of the switchgear panels.

9.0

DEVIATION FROM SPECIFICATION : Should the tenderer wish to deviate from the provisions of the specification either on account of manufacturing practice, or any other reasons, he shall draw attention to the proposed point of deviation in the tender and submit such full information drawing and specification so that merits of his proposal may be fully understood. The specification shall be held binding unless the deviation have been fully recorded as required above.

10.0 11.0

TRAINING FACILITIES : VOID GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : These particulars shall be furnished strictly as per Annexure-A. Any deviation from this specification shall be clearly brought out separately.

12.0

STANDARD MAKE(S) OF RELAYS/OTHER FITMENTS :

Page 137 of 466

The makes of relays/switches/other fitmens may be restricted to as depicted in Annexure B.

Page 138 of 466

ANNEXURE I SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT 1. VACUUM TYPE 12 PANELS, 11 KV SWITCH BOARDS AND EACH SWITCH BOARD COMPRISING OF THE FOLLOWING :1.01. 1 NO. INCOMING PANEL EQUIPPED AS BELOW : -1 No. Triple pole 350 MVA, 11 KV 1250 A draw out type vacuum circuit breaker fitted with arc control device, interlocks, auxiliary switches isolating contacts, emergency hand trip device, mechanical ON & Off indicator and motor operated spring charged mechanism. Bus bars 3 phase 1250 A. Cable termination arrangement located at the rear of the unit for receiving 2 set of power cables each comprising 3 No. single core 630 mm2 11 KV XLPE PVC sheathed cables & complete in all respect. Cable boxes with jointing kits etc. as per clause 5.9 of the specification. CTs of ratio 900-450/0.577-5 A with first core for differential protection having a minimum knee point voltage equal to 40 R CT (neglecting lead resistance) and the 2nd core for REF protection having a minimum knee point voltage of 92 (R CT )V on 900 A tap where R CT secondary winding resistance. These CTs shall conform to accuracy class PS of ISS:2705 (Part-IV) and shall have Magnetising current as low as possible but in no case exceeding the value corresponding to class 5 P of IS:2705 (Part-III). CTs of 900-450/5 A of 15 VA output and 5P10 accuracy for over current and earth fault protection. CTs of 900-450/5 A of 15 VA output, accuracy class 1 & ISF less than 5 for metering instrument. 3 phase star/star connected resin cast voltage transformer of ratio 11000/3 /110/3 volts having 100 VA output for phase with accuracy class 1.0 as per IS: 3156(Part-II)1965 complete with HT & LT fuses, isolating plugs and sockets for HT & LT copper connectors, current limiting resistances. Vermin and dust proof fitments. INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED ON TOP AND EQUIPPED AS BELOW : Ammeter with selector switch as per clause : 5.13.1 of the specification.
Page 139 of 466

-1 Set

- 3 No.

- 3 No. - 3 No. -1 No.

- 1 set -1 NO. -1 No.

-1 No. -1 No. -1 No. -1 Set -1 No.

Voltmeter with selector switch as per clause ;: 5.13.2 of the specification. KWH meter with TTB as per clause : 5.13.3 & 5.2 of the specification. PF meter with TTB as per clause : 5.13.4 of the specification. Triple pole combined over current and earth fault IDMTL relay as per clause : 5.15.1 of the specification. Single pole restricted E/F relay as per clause : 5.15.1 of the specification. This relay will have one of its main contacts used for inter-tripping the ;H.V. transformer controlling circuit breaker. Tripping relay with hand reset contacts suitable for 220 V DC auxiliary supply. Indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker open, close, auto trip & spring charged as per clause 5.10 of the specification. Automatic trip circuit supervision scheme as per clause 5.10 of the specification. PT fuse alarm scheme as per clause 5.12 of the specification. DC fail alarm scheme as ;per clause 5.16 of the specification. Circuit breaker control handle as per clause 5.14 of the specification. Alarm equipment for non-trip & trip fault annunciation as per clause 5.11.1 & 5.11.2 of the specification. Cubicle illumination lamp with door operated ON/OFF switch. 15 A power socket with switch. Anti-condensation tubular space heater suitable for connection to 240 V AC supply with a thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker.

-1 No. -4 No. -1 No. -1 No. -1 No. -1 No. -1 No. -1 No. -1 No. -1 No.

Page 140 of 466

1.02

6 NO. OUTGOING FEEDER PANELS EACH COMPRISING OF : -1 No. Triple pole 400 A, 350 MVA 11 KV circuit breaker fitted with Arc control devices, interlock arrangement, auxiliary switches, isolating contacts, emergency hand trip device, mechanical ON & OFF indicator & motor operated spring charged mechanism operate at 220 V DC. Bus bars 3 phase 1250 A. CTs of ratio 300-150/5-5 A with first core of 15 VA output & 5 P10 accuracy for O/C & E/F protection & second core 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering. Anti-condensation tubular space heater for connection to 240 V AC supply with a thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker. Vermin proof & dust proof fitments. Instrument panel mounted on top & equipped as below :Ammeter with selector switch as per clause : 5.13.1 of specification. KWH meter with TTB as per clause ;: 5.13.3 & 5.2 of the specification. Triple pole combined 2 O/C & 1 E/F IDMTL relay supplemented with triple pole instantaneous relay (high set element) in the form of 2 O/C & 1 E/F as per clause : 5.14.2 of the specification. Tripping relay with hand reset contacts suitable for 220 V DC auxiliary supply. Indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker open, close, auto-trip & spring charged as per clause 5.10 of the specification. Indicating lamp with fittings & push button switch to indicate trip circuit healthy in pre-close & post-close conditions as per clause : 5.10 of the specification. Circuit breaker control handle as per clause : 5.14 of the specification. Cubicle illumination lamp with door operated ON/OFF switch. 15 A power socket with switch.
Page 141 of 466

-1 Set -3 No.

-1 No. -1 Set -1 No. -1 No. -1 No. -1 Set

-1 No. -4 No. -1 No.

-1 No. -1 No. -1 No.

-1 No.

Anti-condensation tubular heater suitable for connection to 240 V AC supply with a thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker.

1.03

2 NOS. OUTGOING FEEDER PANELS :Similar to item 1.02 but with following cable box/CTs :-3 No. CTs of ratio 200-100/5/5 A with first core of 15 VA output & class 5 P10 accuracy for O/C & E/F protection & second core of 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering.

1.04

1 NO. PANEL FOR CAPACITOR BANK : The capacitor controlling breaker should be suitable to meet all conditions required for capacitor operation & should be suitable for controlling capacitive current upto 400 A at 11 KV which is equivalent to 7.5 MVAR approx. & equipped similar to item No. 1.02 except KWH meter but with the following changes/ additions : -2 No. Trifurcating main cable box for receiving 3 core XLPE, PVC sheathed cable upto 185 mm2 size and complete with cable glands and jointing kits etc. as per clause : 5.9 of the specification. CTs of ratio 300-150-75/5 A output & 5P10 accuracy for over current & earth fault protection. Protection scheme including closing circuit interlock timer ;shall be as per clause : 5.15.3 of the specification.

-3 No.

1.05

1 NO. STATION TRANSFORMER FEEDER PANEL : Similar to item No. 1.02 but with the following cable box & CTs :-1 No. Trifurcating main cable box for receiving 3 core XLPE cable upto 50 mm2 size & complete in all respect as per clause : 5.9 of the specification. CTs of ratio 60-30/5-5 A with first core of 15 VA output & class 5P10 accuracy for O/C & E/F protection & second core of 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering.

-3 No.

1.06

1 No. INCOMING PANEL EQUIPPED EXACTLY IDENTICAL TO ITEM 1.01

Page 142 of 466

DETAILED ABOVE NOTE : The two incoming panels at Sr. No. 1.01 & 1.06 shall be placed at the two extreme ends of the switch board. Provision shall be made to split the 14 panels boards into two parts each having an incoming panel at its end with complete non-trip alarm, trip alarm & protection schemes.

Page 143 of 466

ANNEXURE-A

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. a) b) 7. 8. 9. b) 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. b) 20. 21. b) Makers name & country of manufacturer. Type Nominal system voltage Highest system voltage Frequency Normal current ratings As ref. Ambient temp. as per relevant standard. At site conditions. Symmetrical breaking capacity. Asymmetrical breaking capacity. a) Symmetrical breaking current. Short time current rating for 1 sec. Making capacity. 1.2/50 Micro second impulse wave withstand test voltage. One minute power frequency withstand test voltage. No. of Poles. No. of breaks in circuit per pole. Length of break per phase. Opening time. Making time Arc duration a) Type and material and main contacts. Material & thickness of plating of contacts. Type of arcing contacts and/or arc control device. a) Whether the circuit breaker is trip free ? Whether it is with lock out preventing closing ?
Page 144 of 466

22. 23.

Nominal voltage of closing mechanism. Power required to close circuit breaker at nominal voltage.

24. a) b) 25. a) b) 26. 27. 28. 29. B.

Minimum clearance in air. Between phases. Between the live parts and earth. Minimum clearance in vacuum Between phases. Between the live parts and earth. Total weight of complete breaker. Dimensions and mounting details. Standard to which conforms. Details of reference drawings attached. INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS : i) a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) CURRENT TRANSFORMERS : Name of manufacturer. Rated primary current. Rated secondary current. Rated transformation ratio. V.A. output at rated current & accuracy. Class of accuracy. Rated over current factor with time in seconds. Type of CTs (whether wound or bar type) One minute power frequency withstand test voltage. 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand voltage.
Page 145 of 466

k) ii) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) C. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)

Standard to which conform. VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER : Name of manufacturer. Rated primary voltage. Rated secondary voltage. Rated burden. Class of accuracy. Rated voltage factor and time. One minute power frequency withstand test voltage. 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand test voltage. Standard to which conform RELAYS : Name of manufacturer. Type & make Setting range Other details Standard to which conform D. BUS BAR

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E. 1.

Material Normal current rating Nominal area per phase Shape Type of insulation. VACUUM INTERRUPTER BOTTLE

Name of manufacturer.
Page 146 of 466

2. 3.

Whether imported or indigenous. Manufacturers type, normal Amps. & rupturing capacity for vacuum bottles on incoming panel. Manufacturers type, normal Amps. & rupturing capacity for vacuum bottles on outgoing panel. Manufacturers type, normal Amps. & rupturing capacity for vacuum bottles on capacitor control panel. Degree of vacuum inside the vacuum interruptors. Short time rating of vacuum bottles. Number of full short circuit operation, as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56 which vacuum bottles offered can safely withstand. Whether the vacuum bottles used on incoming and outgoing panels are same or different. Whether the operating mechanism is imported or indigenous. the used

4.

used

5.

used

6. 7. 8.

9.

10.

(SIGNATURE OF SUPPLIER)

Page 147 of 466

ANNEXURE-B

STANDARD MAKE (S) OF RELAYS/FITMENTS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. RELAYS BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH -ALSTOM/EASUN REYROLLE/ABB -KAYCEE/ALSTOM/RECOM

AMMETER/VOLTMETER/SELECTOR -KAYCEE/RECOM SWITCH AMMETER/VOLTMETER/POWER FACTOR METER WATT HOUR METER PUSH BUTTONS INDICATING LAMPS WITH LENSES CABLE TERMINATION KITS CABLE GLANDS PANEL WIRING HOOTER/BUZZER/BELL -AE/IMP/MECO - SIMCO/AE/ABB/ENERCON/ L&T/SECURE -ALSTOM/KAYCEE/VAISHNO -ALSTOM/KAYCEE/VAISHNO -DENSON/M-SEAL/CAB SEAL -DENSON/M-SEAL/COMET -ECKO/PHOENIX -ANCHOR/KAYCEE

Page 148 of 466

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No.S-51/DD-121

12 KV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER (Out Door) Kiosk With CT, PT & HT TVM

Chief Engineer/PD&C., DHBVN, Hisar.

Month of Issue :

June, 2006

Page 149 of 466

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 12 KV VACUUM CIRICUIT BREAKER (OUTDOOR) KIOSK WITH CT, PT & HT TVM.
5.1 Scope :

5.1.1 This specification is intended to covers the design,, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturers works, supply and delivery of 12 KV Vacuum Circuit Breaker Kiosks with current transformes, potential transformers, protection relays, metering instruments etc. Complete with all material and accessories for efficient and trouble free operation. 5.1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely here in all the details of the design and construction of equipment. However the equipment shall confirm in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the bidders guarantee, in a manner acceptable to purchaser, who will interpret the meaning of drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his judgement are not in accordance there with. The offered equipment shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation along with associated equipments, interlocks, protection schemes etc. Such component shall be deemed to be with in the scope of supply, irrespective of whether they are specifically brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not.
5.2 Standards : The 12 KV Vacuum Circuit Breaker Kiosks shall conform to latest revisions with amendments of standards as under unless specified otherwise. Equipment meeting with the requirement of any other authoritative standards, which ensure equal or better quality than the standard mentioned above will also, be acceptable. In such cases a copy of standard (English version) adopted, should be enclosed with the tender. IEC 56/IS 13118 / IS 3427 IS : 3156 IS : 2705 IS : 3231 Circuit breaker / metal enclosed switchgear & Control gear. Voltage transformers. Current transformers Electrical Relays for power system
Page 150 of 466

protection. IS : 1248 IS 14697 1999 IEC 62053 22 2003 IEC 62052 11 2003 CBIP technical report No. 88 revised July, 1966 read With amendment issued (April, 99, September, 99 and also any other amendment thereafter. 5.3 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : Meters and instruments. AC Static Transformer Operated Watt-hour and VAR-Hour Meters, class 0.2S & 0.5S. Specification for AC static watt hour meters, class 0.2 S & 0.5 S. Specification for AC static electrical energy meter.

Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions :(i) Peak ambient air temperature in shade 500C (ii) Minimum ambient air temperature in shade -2.50C (iii) Maximum relative humidity 100% (iv) Minimum relative humidity 26% (v) Dust storms are liable to occur in the period From March to July (vi) Height above main sea level Less than 1000 M (vii) Average No. of thunder storm days per annum 35 days. (viii) Average annual rain fall (Depending on area) 10 to 100 Cms. (ix) Number of months of tropical monsoon conditions 4 per annum.

5.4

PRINCIPLE PARAMETERS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS : 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 TYPE AND RATING Type Service Pole Rated Voltage (Nominal/max.) Rated Frequency System Neutral Earthing INSULATION LEVEL : 4.1.7.1 Impulse withstand 4.1.7.2 One minute Power frequency Withstand voltage. Rated current 4.1.8.1 Continuous at 50 degree C O/G 4.1.8.2 Short time current for 3 seconds
Page 151 of 466

12 KV Vacuum Circuit Breaker Outdoor Three 11 / 12 KV 50 Hz. Effectively grounded. 75 KV Peak 35 KV rms as per IS 3427. -800 A for I/C & 400A for 18.4 KA

4.1.8

4.1.9 4.1.9.1 4.1.9.2 4.1.10 4.1.11 4.1.12 4.1.13 4.1.14 4.1.15 4.1.16

Rated breaking capacity : Symmetrical Asymmetrical Rated making capacity Rated short time with stand current for 3 seconds Total break time Creepage distance Protection class of kiosk Operating duty for gang operation Operating mechanism

-18.4 KA / 350 MVA As per relevant IS 2.5 x 16 KA 18.4 KA 5 cycles (Max.) 300 mm or more IP-55 as per IEC 529 O 3min. CO 3mm CO Motor operated spring charged closing mechanism. 220 V - 240 V 240 V AC Bimetallic clamp type Aluminium alloy. 10% Panther and 90% dog conductor 11 / 12 KV Three Effectively earthed 18.4 KA rms symmetrical 415 V 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz 230 V 1 phase 2 wire, 50 Hz

4.1.17 Spring Charging motor 4.1.17.1 Heater / Lamp /Socket 4.1.18 Terminal connector 4.1.18.1 Type 4.1.18.2 4.2 4.2.1 Suitable for ACSR conductor System details : HV system Voltage (nominal/max.) Phases System Neutral Fault level Auxiliary Power supply AC Supply

4.2.2 4.2.2.1 5.5 5.5.1

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS : DESIOGN CRITERIA : i) The equipment will be used in high voltage system having characteristics as listed in the specification. The equipment will be installed outdoor in a hot humid and tropical atmosphere. All equipment, accessories and wiring shall have tropical protection, involving special treatment of metal and insulation against fungus, insects and corrosion. The maximum temperature in any part of the equipment at specified rating shall not exceed the permissible limits as stipulated in the relevant standards. The equipment shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal stresses of listed short circuit current without any damage or deterioration.
Page 152 of 466

ii)

iii) iv)

v)

The safety clearances of all live parts of the equipment shall be as per relevant standards.

5.5.2

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS :

5.5.2.1 The vacuum circuit breaker kiosk shall be for out door installation. The duty of the circuit breaker shall involve satisfactory interruption of short circuit currents as listed in the specification. The breaker shall be capable of clearing the Kilometric fault of same magnitude as rated short circuit current. The breaker shall be capable of interruption of low reactive current (lagging / leading ) without undue over voltage. 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES : The circuit breaker shall be triple pole horizontal draw out /fixed type enclosed in kiosk of CRCA sheet steel of 3 mm thickness for load bearing members and 2 mm thickness for non-load bearing members and comply with latest edition of IS : 13118/3427/IEC-56. The kiosk shall be vermin proof and dust tight. The switchgears & control gears shall be complete with all necessary supporting framework, nuts & bolts etc. for securing the same to the floor. The operating mechanism shall operate (close/open) all the three phases simultaneously. The operating mechanism links etc. should be accessible for maintenance. Mechanical safety shutters should be provided between the breakers and panel. The circuit breaker and its operating mechanism shall be fully interlocked to prevent mal-operation. All the breakers shall be supplied with necessary clamps and connectors suitable for appropriate current ratings. Rigid type bimetallic / aluminium alloy terminal connectors of 800 Amps.(800 Amps for I/C & 400 Amps for O/G) current rating form part of supply. Suitable arrangement of earthing the switchgear shall be provided. All the connecting bus bars shall be made of copper. Switchgear (Vacuum Circuit breaker etc.) and control gear (CTs, PTs, relay etc.) shall be mounted on the same kiosk. Bus bars shall be air insulated with PVC insulation / sleeves on electrostatic power coating. The bus bars should be of electrolytic copper with permissible limits of current density. Size of the bus bar and current density should be specified in the tender. The bus bars conductor shall conform to IS : 8084 & IS : 3427 and shall be rated for 800 Amps.(800 Amps for I/C & 400 Amps for O/G), short time current 18.4 KA for 3 sec. All the meters, instruments, relays etc. shall be mounted on the switchgear kiosk. The outdoor circuit breakers ( Kiosk) shall be suitable for AC series tripping arrangement.

5.5.2.2

5.5.2.3

Page 153 of 466

5.5.2.4

The kiosk shall have an arrangement for emergency shunt tripping from remote place in addition to arrangement for local emergency tripping (mechanical). The kiosk shall also have a system to check the Trip Circuit healthy check in all the three phase. Necessary series trip and closing coils shall be provided for operation of the breakers. All the six terminals shall be brought out through appropriate class bushings. The arcing contacts shall be made of homogeneous special alloy so that surge voltages are reduced to negligible level and multiple reignition is eliminated. The circuit breakers shall be electrically and mechanically trip free under various conditions. MAIN CONTACTS : i) The main contacts shall have adequate area and contact pressure for carrying rated continuous and short time current without excessive heating liable to cause pitting and welding. The breaker may be provided with silver plated contacts, if necessary, to meet requirement of IS : 13118 / IEC 56 where higher temperature rise is permitted with silver-plated contacts. The quantity of silver facing shall be such that after carrying out one tenth of total number of operations specified for mechanical endurance tests, there is still continuous layer of silver on contacts.

5.5.2.5 5.5.2.6 5.5.2.7

5.5.3

ii)

5.5.4

NUMBER & TYPE OF SPARE, AUXILIARY CONTACTS/SWITCHES : Adequate numbers of spare auxiliary switches / contacts both of normally open & normally close type but not less than four each shall be provided on the circuit breaker for use in the indication and controlling scheme of circuit breaker.

5.5.5

INTERLOCK : All electrical and mechanical interlocks, which are necessary for safe and satisfactory operation of the circuit breaker, shall be provided.

5.5.6

BUSHINGS FOR CIRCURIT BREAKER KIOSK : The out door circuit breakers shall be metal enclosed fitted with weather proof / suitable type bushings conforming to IS : 2099 and shall be designed to have the necessary mechanical strength & rigidity required and shall be free fromm objectionable interference and external & internal corona. The porcelain shall be of the wet process type, homogeneous, free from laminations and cavities or other flaws, which could affect its chemical and mechanical strength and shall not be injuriously stressed by temperature change. The porcelain shall be thoroughly vitrified tough and impervious to moisture and shall be evenly glazed. The glazing shall be free from blisters or burrs. The bushing shall be
Page 154 of 466

designed, manufactured & tested in accordance with latest edition of IS : 2099. The type and characteristic data bushing shall be clearly specified. 5.5.7 OPERATING MECHANISM : Characteristics of operating mechanism of circuit breaker and associated equipments. Method of operation : The circuit breakers shall be equipped with poweroperated mechanism to operate all three phases simultaneously using 220 V / 240 V AC motor operated spring closing mechanism. It shall be electrically and mechanically trip free under various conditions. Kiosks shall also be provided with hand-operated spring charging closing mechanism. Operation counter and mechanical ON-OFF indicator shall be provided. 5.5.8 VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER : The three phase vacuum circuit will have three vacuum interrupters (one interrupter per phase) mounted on same carriage. The interrupters shall be air insulated with epoxy resin / insulated phase barriers. Each interrupter shall have fixed and moving contacts in sealed envelopes having vacuum below 10-6 torr/ The metallic below shall permit axial movement of moving contact and act as vacuum seal. The contacts shall have requisite mechanical strength and good electrical and thermal conductivity and shall be made of copper chromium alloy. Complete literature of vacuum bottles shall be furnished with the tender. 5.5.9 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS : i) Highest equipment voltage : 12 KV ii) No. of phases : 3 Nos., single phase. Insulation level a) Impulse withstand voltage : 75 KVP b) One minute power frequency withstand voltage on : i) Primary winding : 35 KV rms. ii) Secondary winding : 2 KV rms. Frequency : 50 Hz. Transformation ratio : 11---/110V (Phase to Phase. Rated output : 100 VA / phase Accuracy class : 0.5 for metering. Rated voltage factor : 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds. Type off insulation : Resin cast. Voltage Transformers shall be provided with HRC type fuses on the secondary side. One of the secondary terminals of the Voltage Transformer shall be solidly earthed. Three numbers single phase voltage transformer of this rated
Page 155 of 466

iii)

iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix)

output will be required for each circuit breaker kiosk. Voltage transformers shall be fixed type and shall be suitable for single phasing. 5.5.10 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS : 1. 2. Rated Voltage Insulation level : 75 KVP : 35 KV rms. : 3 KW rms. : 50 Hz. : 120% of rated Primary Current. : 18.4 KA for 3 sec. : 400-200/5-5A for I/C 300-150/5-5A for O/G Core I 15 VA 5P 15 Relaying --Core II 15 VA 0.5 -Metering 5 : 12 KV

a) Impulse withstand voltage b) One minute power frequency withstand Voltage on : i) Primary winding ii) Secondary winding 3. 4. 5. 6. Frequency Rated continuous thermal current Short time thermal rating and its duration Transformation ration

a) b) c) d) 7.

Rated output Class of accuracy Accuracy limit factor Purpose

Max. instrument security factor

(VA burden should not be less than suitable for series tripping arrangement provided). 12 KV current transformers shall be single phase. The core shall be of highgrade non-ageing laminated silicon steel of low hysterisis loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy for both normal and fault current. The rating of secondary winding shall be 5 Amps. Required transformation ratio can be achieved in any manner. However, the current transformers will have to satisfy the requirement of rated VA burden, class of accuracy, accuracy limit factor and short time thermal rating as have been specified above at all transformation ratio. The ratings of current transformers of all classes regarding ratio error, knee point voltage, resistance of secondary winding etc. shall have to be coordinated with the requirements of protective relays and protection scheme without any extra cost.
Page 156 of 466

5.5.11 Tenderer shall also furnish along with the tender, complete general arrangement, schematic and outline diagrams indicating the mounting arrangement and position of current transformers, potential transformer, terminal block etc. Type of current transformer and potential transformer employed shall also be clearly stated.

5.5.12

INDICATING AND INTERGRATING METERS / INSTRUMENTS :

All indicating instruments shall be of switchboard type, bank connected, suitable for flush mounting and provided with dust and vermin proof cases for tropical use and finished in suitable colour. All instruments shall have practical laboratory means for adjustment of accuracy. The limits of errors for ammeters / voltmeters shall be those permissible for class 1.5 instruments as per IS : 1248. The ammeters and voltmeters shall be suitable sealed to indicate the current/voltage for all the rating of current / voltage transformers. A phase selector switch with four / six position shall be used to measure to current / voltage of each phase. The meters shall be located at eye level to facilitate observation of reading correctly. The 3 Phase 4 wire AC static HT Trivector meter with accuracy class 0.5 S shall conform to relevant standards and as per specification appended at Annexure A, KWH meter shall have better performance even when single phasing. 5.5.12 RELAYS : Three-phase protection relays having 2 elements for over current protection and one element for earth fault protection shall be provided. The setting range of over current element shall be 50% to 200% and that for earth fault element from 20% to 80% in seven equal steps. The relay shall be induction type, non-directional with inverse and definite minimum time characteristics. The circuit breaker for out door kiosks shall be fitted with AC series tripping device for operation on over load and earth fault by relays. The relays shall be drawout type mounted in flush pattern on the panel board. If the relays are static / numerical, the same can be fixed type also. The relays offered by the supplier shall fully conform to the requirement of IS : 3231 and shall be suitable for operation under the climatic conditions specified in this specification. Each relay shall be provided with dust tight, removable glass covers with glass window. All fault detecting relays shall be equipped with operation indicators. In three phase relays with separate elements, each phase shall have separate indicator. The relays shall have an auxiliary unit fitted with two pairs of hand-reset contacts. The relays shall be rated for 5 Amps. Suitable arrangement shall also be provided for adjustment of the operating time of relays the tenders shall furnish details in this regard along with the offer. 5.5.14 WIRING :

Page 157 of 466

All wiring shall be of switch board consisting of copper conductor of 2.5 sq. mm cross section insulated with polyvinyl chloride insulation suitable for 660 V service and in accordance with relevant IS: ;732. Polyvinyl chloride used shall have excellent resistance against burning, moisture, oil and vermin and shall be finished with clear colour. Rubber insulated wiring shall not be acceptable. Tenders shall furnish the details of method being adopted by them for joint / connections. All instruments and panel wiring shall be of heat resisting and self-extinguishing type in compliance with British Standard Practice / IS. Plastic or porcelain cleats of the limited compression type shall be used for holding wiring runs. All wires shall be suitable for bending to meet the terminal studs at right angles. Metal cases of all apparatus mounted on kiosk shall be separately earthed be means of copper wire or strips. The following colour scheme of the wiring shall be used as per IS : 375. i) AC three phase circuits : No. 1 phase No. 2 phase No. 3 phase Neutral conductor Connection to earth Red Yellow Blue Black Green

ii) iii)

5.5.15 TERMINAL BLOCKS : Terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade, box clamp type ELMEX 10 Sq. mm or approved equal. Not more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal. Spare terminals equal in number to 20% of active terminals shall be furnished. Terminal blocks shall be located to allow easy access. Wiring shall be so arranged that individual wires of any external cable can be connected to consecutive terminals. 5.5.16 TEST TERMINAL BLOCKS : Two Nos. test terminal block shall be provided lone for testing of relays and other for testing meters. They shall be of switchboard type, back connected for front of panel mounting. The test blocks shall provide complete isolation of meters, instruments etc. and the arrangement shall be such that testing power could be connected at the test block from any external source or may be taken from the instrument transformers. Provision shall be made for short circuiting current transformers. Suitable sealing arrangement shall be provided in test terminal blocks. 5.5.17 INDICATNG LAMPS : Indicating lamps shall be provided on the control board to indicate the following : i) ii) Visual indication of ON and OFF position of each circuit breaker. PT supply indication.
Page 158 of 466

Each lamp body shall be of moulded insulation and shall be able to withstand a high voltage test of appropriate value. All lamps shall be suitable for 240 V AC supply and shall have low power consumption and shall provide a wide angle of illumination of sufficient intensity for comfortable viewing. A glass of appropriate colour shall be screwed into the front of the lamp body. The design of the indication lamps shall be such as the facilitate replacement of burnt lamps. An engraved lable indicating the purpose of the lamp shall be provided with each lamp. 5.5.18 FERRULES : Ferrules engraved / printed with the same numbers, letters of symbols as indicated in the connections and wiring diagram shall be provided on the terminal ends of all wires for identification of circuits for inspection and maintenance. Ferrules shall be of strong and flexible insulating material with glossy finish to prevent adhesion. They shall be engraved / printed and clearly marked land shall not be effected by dampness. Ferrule numbering shall be in accordance with IS : 375. The same ferrule number shall not be used on wires in different circuits on a panel.

5.6

SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENTS, FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES : 12 KV Circuit breakers kiosks for outdoor installation :

5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3

5.6.4

12 KV, 800 Amps, vacuum circuit breakers horizontal drawout/ fixed type with provision of manual tripping by means of push button and emergency shunt tripping. AC motor charged spring operated closing mechanism AC series tripping arrangement for operation on over current (load) and earth fault by relays along with emergency shunt tripping from remote place iaddition to local emergency tripping (mech.) Single phase 12 KV current transformers of ratio 400-200/5-5A for I/C & 300-150/5-5A for O/G suitable for metering and protection. The class of accuracy shall be 0.5 for metering and 5 P 15, for protection. Rated burden (output) shall be 15 VA for each secondary winding and it should not be less than suitable for tripping arrangement provided. Instrument security factor for metering core shall not Exceed 5. Rigid type bimetallic / Al. alloy terminal connectors of suitable for ACSR (10% Panther and 90% Dog Conductor) both horizontal / vertical take off. Mechanical ON / OFF indicator Operating handle for independent manual closing mechanism Red indicating lamp for ON indication Red indicating lamp for OFF indication Green indicating lamp for OFF indication Spare auxiliary contacts / switch having minimum 4 NO + 4 NC
Page 159 of 466

1 No. 1 No. 1 No.

3 Nos.

5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10

6 Nos. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 Set

5.6.11 5.6.12 5.6.13

Flush mounting pattern 96 x 96 Sq. mm moving iron ammeter of 1 No. class 1.5 accuracy suitably scaled for 5 Amps. CT secondary Ammeter selector switch to indicate phase current in all three 1 No. phase and with OFF position Triple pole IDMT type protection relay having two element for over current protection and one element for earth fault protection suitable for matching AC series tripping arrangement. The current setting range of the over current elements shall be from 50% to 200% in steps of 25% and that of earth fault element from 20% of 80% in steps of 10%. Following makes of relays are acceptable : i) Alstom ii) ABB iii) Easun Reyrolle iv) JVS] v) Siemens vi) Ashida

In case bidders want to provide relays other than above make then as a qualification requirement the bidder must have supplied upto at least 80% of total quantity of respective relays (similar type and model) as worked out on the basis of quantities of panels indicated in schedule of requirement of this specification must have been in successful commercial operation in India for last 2 years as on the date of bid opening. The technical suitability of relays / schemes may also be examined by Protection Wing & acceptability will be judged appropriately. 5.6.14 5.6.15 5.6.16 5.6.17 5.6.18 5.6.19 5.6.20 5.6.21 5.6.22 5.6.23 5.6.24 3 Phase 4 wire AC static HT Trivector meter with accuracy class 0.5 S for measurement of energy as per specification appended at Annexure A 3 phase Power factor meter indicating type having range 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead with unit center and 2 deg. Error. Dial size should be 96 x 96 sq. mm or more 240 V. AC single phase 80 or 100 watt anti condensation heaters with thermostat and switch Automatic door illuminating lamps with switch 11000 / 110 V single phase voltage transformers each having 100 VA per phase burden and class of accuracy 0.5 suitably connected to meters & indicating instruments etc. Flush type switchboard mounting pattern 96 x 96 sq mm moving iron AC voltmeter of class 1.5 accuracy suitable for 110 V phase to phase secondary suitable sealed. Voltmeter phase selector switch to indicate phase to phase & phase to ne4utral voltage of all the three phases. Indicating lamps coloured Red, Amber, Blue for PT supply. Test terminal blocks to test meters and relays with sealing arrangement Blank lable on the front of the Kiosk at the top. Door locks with keys for all doors.
Page 160 of 466

1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 3 Nos. 1 No. 1 No. 3 Nos. 2 Nos.l 1 No. 1 Set

5.6.25 5.6.26 5.6.27 5.6.28 5.6.29 5.6.30 5.6.31 5.6.32

Pair of base channel for grouting in floor Arrangement to check trip circuit healthy in all three phases Self auxiliary plug and socket Ground bus system, size 25 x 8 mm copper Alarm bell with timer for breaking tripping indication Operation counter Name plate at front and back of each kiosk Set of three phase air insulated main copper bus bar of 800 A for I/C & 400 A for O/G for continuous current rating with PVC insulation of sleeves, STC rating 16 KA for 3 sec.

1 Pair 1 Set 1 Set 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 Set

5.7 5.7.1

MAKE AND TYPE OF BOUGHT OUT ITEMS : The following make of bought out items will be acceptable to department : Sr. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. NAME OF ITEM Indicating instrument (Analog type) Indicating Instrument (Digital type) Control switch for Circuit Breaker / trip transfer Selector Switch for Voltmeter / Ammeter Semaphore indicator Indicating lamp MAKE

AE/IMP/MECO AE/IMP/MECO ALSSTOM / RECOM / SWITRON / KAYCEE SWITRON / KAYCEE / RECOM ALSTOM / DAV IND./ER ALSTOM / TEKNIC / VAISHNO / DAV Annunciator MINILEC / YESHMUN / INSTALRAM / PROTON / JVS / PRADEEP / ALAN Push button TEKNIC / VAISHNO / ESSEN A.C. Hooter /Bell TARGET / INDUSTRIAL HOOTER / ALAN / JVC D.C. Hooter TARGET / INDUSTRIAL HOOTER / ALAN / JVC Heater SOFIA / ELTER / AIREX / KAYCEE Link type test terminal block for IMP / CAPITAL testing of TVM CFL Tube PHILIPS / CROMPTON / BAJAJ 2 Pin / 3 Pin socket with switch ISI MARK ( 5 / 15 A).

Page 161 of 466

Other makes shall also acceptable if it is of l ISI mark or type tested for which tenderers shall furnish attested Photostat copies of ISI certificate / type test report not older than 3 years for the respective make offered along with tender. 5.7.2 Make / type of each relay, indicating instruments, integrating instruments, control switches, selector switches, indicating lamps, semaphore indicators, annunciator scheme, bell, hooter etc., shall be clearly and invariably indicated in the GTP (Guaranteed Technical Particulars) bill of material and unit price list. Only specific make accessories shall be indicated. The word EQUIVALENT / REPUTED MAKE will not be given for consideration. Other standard accessories, which are not specifically mentioned but are required, to be supplied with circuit breaker kiosk of similar type and rating for efficient and trouble free operation. 5.8 TEMPERATURE RISE :

The maximum temperature rise of various parts of the circuit breakers when tested under rated conditions shall not exceed the specified values at a peak ambient temperature of 500C. The breakers may be provided with silver plated contacts if necessary to meet the requirement of IS : 13118/IEC-56 where higher temperature rise is permitted with silver-plated contacts. The quantity of silver facing shall be such that after carrying out one tenth of the total number of operations specified for the mechanical endurance test, there is still continuous layer of silver on the contacts. The temperature rise of CTs & PTs shall also not exceed the permissible values as per relevant Indian Standards when corrected for maximum ambient temperature at site.

5.9 5.9.1

TESTS : TEST BEFORE DESPATCH : The 12 KV circuit breaker and accessories shall be subjected to makers works before despatch, to the following tests as per relevant IS / IEC : ROUTINE TESTS ON EACH UNIT AS PER RELEVANT STANDARDS: i) ii) iii) iv) v) One-minute power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit. Voltage withstand test on control & auxiliary circuits. Measurement of the resistance of main circuit. Mechanical operating test. Design and visual checks. TYPE TESTS CONDUCTED ON ONE UNIT OF EACH RATING AS PER RELEVANT STANDARDS : i) Dielectric tests.
Page 162 of 466

A)

B)

ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) xii) C)

a) Lightning impulse voltage test. b) One-minute power frequency test (wet & Dry). Short time withstand current and peak withstand current test. Basic short circuit duties test. Single-phase short circuit test. Mechanical operation test. Out of phase making & breaking test. Capacitive current switching test. a) Cable charging test. b) Single capacitor bank current switching test. Measurement of resistance of main circuit. Temperature rise test. Environment tests. IP 55 test ( for cubical / control cabinet ). Any other type tests not specified about abut covered as per amendment / latest Edition of relevant IS / IEC. The type test reports of Circuit Breakers, Current Transformers, Potential Transformers, Relays, Meters etc. shall be complete in all respect as per relevant ISS / IEC. TYPE TESTS : The 12 KV Vacuum Circuit Breaker kiosk offered shall be fully type tested as per relevant standards. The bidder must furnish type test reports along with bid, in respect of the equipment (of the type and design offered) type tested in NABL approved test Laboratory for which particular test the lab has been accredited. These type tests must not have been conducted earlier than three years from the date of opening of bid. The bidder may furnish type test reports within 45 days from the date of opening of bid. In case type test reports are not received within 45 days after opening of bid, the offer will be treated as non-responsive. However, the purchaser reserves the right to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in presence of purchasers representative. For this purpose, the bidder should indicate unit rates for carrying out such type tests. These test charges shall not be taken into consideration for bid evaluation. TEST ON BOUGHT OUT ITEMS : Tests are not required to be performed on bought out equipments / items like motor, terminal connectors, CTs, PTs, Relays, Meters etc. at the works of manufacturer. Furnishing type test certificate as per relevant IS of these items from the original equipment manufacturers shall be deemed to be satisfactory
Page 163 of 466

5.9.2 i) ii)

iii)

iv)

5.9.3

evidence. Inspection of the tests of Sub-contractors works will be arranged by the supplier whenever required. 5.9.4 (i) ROUTINE / ACCEPTANCE TESTS : The following acceptance and routine tests shall be got conducted in presence of purchasers representative as per stipulation of the relevant standards, on each unit : b) c) d) e) (ii) a) One-minute power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit. Voltage withstand test on control & auxiliary circuits. Measurement of the resistance of main circuit. Mechanical operating test. Design and visual checks. Inspection & test on Control Gear : In addition to the above tests at 5.9.4 (i) specified by IEC, the following shall also be performed at manufacturers works in presence of purchasers representative after completely assembling of the kiosk. a) b) c) d) (iii) (iv) 5.9.5 Checking wiring of circuits land their contacts. Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipment mounted on panels. Checking and operational protective schedule and instruments meters. Checking of phase faults between R & Y, Y & B and B & R phases. Breakers should trip under all three conditions.

Temperature rise test on one No. breaker in the first lot shall also be done in presence of the purchasers representative. Any other tests not specified ;about abut covered as per amendment / latest edition of relevant IS / IEC. TOLERANCE ON TEST RESULTS : As per relevant standards / specification.

5.9.6

TESTS AT SITE : The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on 12 KV circuit breakers after arrival at site and the contractor shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions.

5.10 INSPECTION :

Page 164 of 466

i)

All the tests (as mentioned at clause 5.9.4) and Inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the bidder and purchaser at the time of purchase. The bidder shall afford the inspection officer(s) representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities without charges, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at his own cost by an independent agency whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply. The Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture before despatch as per relevant standard. Inspection and acceptance of any material under the specification by the purchaser, shall not relieve the bidder of his obligation of supplying the material in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the purchaser informed in advance, about manufacturing programme so that arrangements can be made for inspection. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance / routine testing of the bought out items. The bidder shall give 15 days (for local supplies) / 30 days (in case of foreign bidder) advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing the acceptance and routine tests. The inspection charges (inspectors traveling, boarding & lodging) would be to the purchasers account. NOTE FOR FOREIGN BIDDER : The bidder shall indicate the name(s) of reputed inspection agencies and their inspection charges clearly for each lot. The inspection charges will be borne by the purchaser. However, purchaser reserves the right to appoint at its cost any inspection agency to carry out the inspection.

ii) iii)

iv) v)

5.11 TEST ON A.C. HT TRIVECTOR METER : All routine / acceptance tests, as per relevant IS, if required shall be carried out at the manufacturers works. 5.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN : 5.12.1 The tenderer shall invariably furnish the following information along with his offer, failing which the offer shall be liable for rejection. Information shall be separately given for rejection. Information shall be separately given for individual type of equipment offered. Statement giving list of important raw materials, Names of sub-suppliers for the raw material, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested, list of
Page 165 of 466

i)

tests normally carried out on raw material in the presence of suppliers representative, and copies of test certificates. ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) Information and copies of test certificates as in (i) above in respect of bought out accessories. List of manufacturing facilities available. Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing exists. List of areas in manufacturing process where stage inspections are normally carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections. Special features provided in the equipment to make it maintenance free. List of testing equipment available with the supplier for final testing of equipment specified and test plan limitation, if any vis--vis the type, special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards. These limitations shall be very clearly brought out in the schedule of deviations from specified test requirements. The successful tenderer shall within 30 days of placement of order, submit the following information to the purchaser : List of raw material as well as bought out accessories and the name of the material as well as bought out accessories land the name of sub-suppliers selected from those furnished along with the offer. Type test certificates of the raw material and bought out accessories.] Quality assurance plan (QAP) with hold points for purchasers inspection. The QAP and purchasers hold points shall be discussed between the purchaser and the supplier before the QAP is finalized. The successful bidder shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out accessories and central excise passes for raw material viz oil, copper, aluminium, conductors, insulating materials, core material at the time of routine testing of the fully assembled equipment.

5.12.2 i)

ii) iii)

5.12.3

5.13 DOCUMENTATION : 5.13.1 All drawings shall confirm to international standards organization (ISO) A series of drawing sheets/Indian Standards Specifications. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for microfilming. All dimensions and data shall be in S.I. units.
Page 166 of 466

5.13.2

List of drawings and documents :a) b) c) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment. Graphs showing the performance of equipments in regard to magnetization characteristics. Sectional view showing : i) ii) iii) iv) d) provided. e) f) g) tested. h) material. Test reports, literature, pamphlets of bought out items and raw Name / Rating plate. Schematic wiring drawing with write up. Type test reports in case the equipment has already been type General constructional features. The materials / gasket / sealing used. The insulation, the winding arrangements, method of connection of the primary / secondary winding to the primary / secondary terminals etc. Porcelain used and its dimensions along with the mechanical and electrical characteristics. Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs

5.13.3

The successful tenderer shall, with in 2 weeks of placement of order, submit four sets of final version of all the above said drawings for purchasers approval. The purchaser shall communicate ;his comments / approval on the drawing to the supplier with in four ;weeks. The supplier shall, if necessary modify the drawings and resubmit three copies of the modified drawings for owners approval with in two weeks from the date of owners comments. After receipt of owners approval, the supplier shall within two weeks, submit 12 prints and two good qualities reproducible of the approved drawings for purchaser use. Six sets of the type test reports, duly approved by the purchaser, shall be submitted by the supplier before commencement of supply. Adequate copies of acceptance and routine test certificates, duly approved by the purchaser shall accompany the despatch consignment. The manufacturing of the equipments shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and no deviations shall be permitted with out the written approval of purchaser. All manufacturing & fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to approval of the drawing shall be at the suppliers risk. 16 sets of nicely printed and bound volumes of operation, maintenance and erection manuals in English language, for each type and rating of equipment supplied shall be submitted by the supplier for distribution, prior to the despatch of the equipment. The manual shall contain all the drawings and information
Page 167 of 466

5.13.4

5.13.5

5.13.6

required for erection, operation and maintenance of the circuit breaker. The manual shall also contain a set of all the approved drawings, type test reports etc. 5.13.7 Approval of drawings / work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier from his responsibility & liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirement of the latest revision of applicable standard, rules and codes of practices. The equipment shall confirm in all respect to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest revision of relevant standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall have been power to reject any work of material, which, in his judgement is not in full accordance therewith.

5.14 PACKING AND FORWARDING : 5.14.1 The equipment shall be packed in suitable crates so as to withstand handling stresses during transport and outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable material shall be carefully packing. The marked with the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting such a lifting hooks etc., shall be provided. Any material found short without any extra cost. Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following information : a) b) c) d) e) f) g) 5.14.3 Name of the consignee. Details of consignment. Destination. Total weight of consignment. Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate. Handling and unpacking instructions. Bill of materials indicating contents of each package. The supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of materials are approved by the purchaser before dispatch.

5.14.2

5.15 OPTIONAL SPARES : The bidder shall also recommend optional spares that will be required for breakers along with their total and unit prices. However, the prices of optional spares will not be considered for bid evaluation. 5.16 PERFORMANCE WARRANTY PERIOD :
Page 168 of 466

The performance warranty period shall be 5 years from the date of supply of equipment along with its complete accessories. The supplier shall attend the complaint within one month from the date of receipt of complaint and in case complaint is not rectified within one month period, penalty @ 0.5% (half percent) per week shall be levied upon the supplier till complaint of breaker is attended and breaker is again kept in circuit. 5.17 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : The Guaranteed Technical Particulars proforma enclosed as Appendix I with the specification shall be furnished duly filled along with the tender. 5.18 11 KV OUTDOOR VCB (KIOSK TYPE) FOR CAPACITOR : Refer Annexure B.

Sd/Superintending Engineer/P&D., for Chief Engineer/PD&C, DHBVN, Hisar.

Page 169 of 466

ANNEXURE A TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE A.C. STATIC HT TRIVECTOR METER OF ACCURACY CLASS 0.5 S 1. STANDARDS APPLICABLE :

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the performance and testing of the meters shall conform to the following Indian/International Standards and all related Indian/International Standards to be read with up to date and latest amendments/revision thereof : S.No. STANDARD NO. 1. IS 14697-1999 TITLE AC Static Transformer Operated Watthour and VAR-Hour Meters, class 0.2S & 0.5S. Specification for AC Static Electrical Energy Meters, with latest amendments. AC Static Watt-hour. Meters for Active Energy, class 0.2S &0.5S Meter

2. 3. 4.

CBIP Technical Report No. 88 IEC 687 1992

CBIP Technical Report No. 111 Specification for Common Revised July 1996 read with Reading Instrument. amendments issued (April, 1999, September, 1999) and amendment(s) issued thereafter. IS : 9000

5.

Basic Environmental Testing Procedures for Electronic & Electrical items.

Meters matching with requirements of other national or international standards, which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the tenderer conforms to standards other than those specified above, salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule and copy of such standards along with their English translation shall invariably be furnished along with the offer. 2. Rated Voltage (Vref) (Through PT) SUPPLY SYSTEM : 3 x 63.5 V Phase to Neutral (3 phase 4 wire system). 3 x 110 V Phase to Phase. Meter shall be programmed for PT ratio 11 KV/110 V (Ph. To Ph.)
Page 170 of 466

Rated current (Ib) (Connected throughCT)

3 x -/5 Amps.

Multiplying factor to arrive at actual primary values wherever applicable shall be calculated from the CT and PT ratio of the installed CTs and PTs. 3. POWER FACTOR RANGE :

The meter shall be suitable for full power factor range from zero (lagging) through unity to zero (leading). The meter should work as an active energy import and export and reactive (lag and lead) energy meter. 4. POWER SUPPLY VARIATION : The meter should be suitable for working with following supply system variations : Specified operating range - 0.8 to 1.15 V ref. Limit range of operation - 0.7 to 1.20 V ref. Frequency - 50 Hz +/- 5%.

5.

ACCURACY : Class of accuracy of the meter shall be 0.5S. The accuracy should not drift with time.

6. (i)

POWER CONSUMPTION : Voltage circuit : The active and apparent power consumption in each voltage circuit including the power supply of meter at reference voltage, reference temperature and reference frequency shall not exceed 1.5 Watt per phase and 8 VA per phase respectively. Current circuit : The apparent power taken by each current circuit at basic current, reference frequency and reference temperature shall not exceed 1 VA per phase. STARTING CURRENT : The meter should start registering the energy at 0.1% Ib and unity power factor.

(ii)

7.

8.

MAXIMUM CURRENT : The rated maximum current of the meter shall be 200% Ib.

Page 171 of 466

9. i)

GENERAL AND REQUIREMENTS :

CONSTRUCTIONAL

Meters shall be designed and constructed in such a way so as to avoid causing any danger during use and under normal conditions. However, the following should be ensured :-

a) b) c) d) ii) iii) a) iii) b)

Personnel safety against electric shock. Personnel safety against effects of excessive temperature. Protection against spread of fire. Protection against penetration of solid objects, dust and water. All the materials and electronic power components used in the manufacture of the meter shall be of highest quality and reputed make to ensure higher reliability, longer life and sustained accuracy. The manufacturer should use application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) for metering functions. The meter should not have any form of mechanical adjustment such as trimposts, potentiometer etc. for calibration. The meter shall be factory calibrated and no adjustment of calibration shall be possible at site by any means. The electronic components shall be mounted on the printed circuit board using latest Surface Mount Technology (SMT). The PCB material should be made of glass epoxy FR-4 grade conforming to relevant standards or better grade. All insulating materials used in the construction of meters shall be nonhygroscopic, non-ageing and of tested quality. All parts that are likely to develop corrosion shall be effectively protected against corrosion by providing suitable protective coating. The meter shall have an operation indication device such as a blinking LED/LCD. The operation indicator shall be visible from the front window. The meter shall have test out put device in the form of calibrating LED accessible from the front and capable of being monitored conveniently with suitable testing equipment. The meter shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51of IS : 2063/IEC : 60529 for protection against ingress of dust, moisture and vermin. The meter shall be immune to tampering through application of external magnetic field (A.C. electro-magnet or D.C. magnet) as per the value specified in CBIP technical report 88 (with latest amendments).
Page 172 of 466

iii) c)

iv)

v) vi)

vii) viii)

ix) x)

The meter should continue to function even if any spurious signals are injected on the neutral of the meter such as D.C. signals through diodes etc. The meter shall be supplied with a transparent extended terminal-block cover (ETBC).

xi)

METER BASE AND COVER : (a) The meter base, meter cover; terminal block and ETBC shall be made of unbreakable, high grade, frame retardant polycarbonate with thickness more than 2.0 mm, and of good dielectric and mechanical strength. The material of meter base & terminal block shall be glass reinforced. Meter cover and extended terminal block cover (ETBC) should be injection moulded in UV stabilized polycarbonate in natural colour. The ETBC shall be kept fully transparent and the meter cover except the window portion shall be semi-transparent /non-transparent/corrugated. The moulded meter case and terminal cover(s) should not change in colour, shape, size and dimensions, when subjected to 200 hours on UV ageing test. It should withstand 650 deg. C glow wire test and heat deflection test as per ISO 75. The manufacturer shall emboss on the base/cover(s), the name of the material they have used in an abbreviated form e.g. PCFR 10 GF (to denote that they have used polycarbonate flame retardant 10% glass filled polycarbonate). The meter cover shall have a window. The window shall be of transparent, unbreakable, scratch resistant surface UV stabilized polycarbonate material for easily reading all the displayed values/parameters, nameplate details and calibrating LED. The window shall be ultrasonically welded with the meter cover such that it can not be removed undamaged without breaking the cover.

(b)

(c)

(d)

xii)

TERMINAL BLOCK : (a) The detachable terminal block shall be moulded type made of nonhygroscopic, non-ignitable material having good dielectric and mechanical strength. The moulded terminal block shall be made from best quality phenol formaldehyde or glass filled polycarbonate material conforming to FH-1 of IS 11731 (Part-I) having adequate insulating properties and mechanical strength with brass inserts for connecting terminals. The terminal block should satisfy all the conditions specified in IEC-687 & IS-14697. The glass filled polycarbonate should fulfill the requirement of following tests :
Page 173 of 466

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (b)

The flame retardant rating of VO as per UL94 testing. The glow wire temperature of 960oC. Heat deflection temperature of 135oC. Ball pressure test at 125oC.

The terminal block, the ETBC and the meter case shall ensure reasonable safety against the spread of fire and shall not be ignited by the thermic overload of live parts in contact with them. The current circuit conductors of a meter shall be connected to its current terminals inside the meter terminal block adopting procedure prescribed either B-1 or B-2 of the recommended methods under Clause 6.4 Annexure-B of IS 13779-1999. Any other method which meets this requirement in a better manner/way shall also be considered. The bidder should elaborate the arrangement adopted. The meter terminal block shall have tin plated brass terminals. The terminals shall have suitable construction with barriers and transparent cover to provide firm and safe connections of incoming and outgoing leads. The terminal screws shall have flat bottom so as not to pierce in the external conductors. The terminals shall be of suitable rating to carry continuously Imax current and made of electroplated (or tinned) brass and shall be of replaceable type. Any other provision which meets this requirement in a better manner / way shall also be considered. The bidder should elaborate the procedure adopted.

(c)

(d)

(e)

(i) The manner of fixing the external conductors to the terminal block shall ensure adequate and durable contact such that there is no risk of loosening or undue heating. Screw connections transmitting contact force and screw fixings, which may be tightened and loosened several times during the life of the meter, shall screw into the body of brass terminal. All parts of each terminal shall be such that the risk of corrosion is minimized. Two screws shall be provided in each current terminal for effectively clamping the external leads or thimbles. Each clamping screw shall engage a minimum of three threads in the terminal. The ends of screws shall not pierce and cut the conductors used. Electrical connection shall be so designed that contact pressure shall not be transmitted through insulating materials. If the manner of fixing of terminals is through thimbles / lugs/reducer type terminals. The supplier shall supply a set of the same along with each meter.

(e)

(ii) The internal diameter of the terminal hole shall be minimum 4.0 mm. The holes in the insulation material of the terminal block, which form an extension of the terminal holes, shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the insulation of the conductors also. The clearance and
Page 174 of 466

creepage distance shall not be less than the values specified in clause 6.6 of IS 14697 : 1999. Further the supporting webs between two terminals of the terminal block should be sufficiently high to ensure that dust does not bridge the two neighboring terminals or a flash over does not take place. (f) (g) The fixing screw(s) used on the ETBC for fixing and sealing of extended terminal cover shall be held captive on the terminal cover. To facilitate sealing a raised support arrangement with minimum 3 mm hole nearby sealing screws, which shall constitute an integral part of the terminal cover or a slot type arrangement underneath/alongside the sealing screw shall be provided.

xiii)

The termination of current circuit wires inside the meter (i.e. CT primary conductor) on the terminal block shall be through lugs land washers of proper size. The loop length of the primary current circuit should be kept minimum. Alternatively the CT primary conductor may be flattened to form a lug like shape for proper termination on terminal block without using lug or any other better arrangement may also be provided. The meter shall have minimum three fixing holes, one at the top and other two inside the terminal block. The top hole shall be key-hole type on the back of the meter base so that the hanging-screw is not accessible after fixing of the meter and it shall not be possible to remove the meter from the hanging-screw without removing the terminal cover and screw(s) from the terminal block. Any alternate better arrangement shall also be considered for acceptance. The lower fixing holes shall be provided under the extended terminal cover. A set of fixing screws shall be supplied with each meter.

xiv)

xv)

Extended terminal block cover shall be provided to ensure that the internal parts are not accessible for tampering etc. without breaking the seals. The ETBC shall be extended by about 50 mm below the terminal block. A firm connection shall be established with in the meter case to energies the voltage circuit. MARKING OF METER :

10.

The meter terminal marking and mounting arrangement should be as per Indian installation practices. The marking on every meter shall be in accordance with IS 14697-1999 / IEC 687. Every meter shall have nameplate beneath the meter cover such that the name plate cannot be accessed without opening the meter cover and without breaking the seals of the meter cover and the name plate shall be marked indelibly. The nameplate marking should not fade or
Page 175 of 466

otherwise be adversely affected by UV exposure with lapse of time. The basic markings on the meter nameplate shall be as follows : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) (xi) Manufacturers name and trade mark. Type & Designation. Number of phases and wires. Serial number. Month & year of manufacture. Reference voltage / PT ratio. Rated secondary current of CT (11 KV/110 V), -/5 A). Principal unit(s) of measurement. Meter constant (Impulse/KWH, KV Arh, KV/Ah). Class index of meter. Guarantee Period.

11.

CONNECTION DIAGRAM& TERMINAL MARKINGS :

The connection diagram of the meter shall be clearly shown for 3 phase 4 wire system as well as 3 phase 3 wire system, on inside portion of the terminal cover and shall be of permanent nature. The meter terminals shall also be marked land this marking should appear in the above diagram. 12. SOFTWARES :

Adequate number of licensed copies of the following software shall be made available and shall be installed on CMRI and Base Computer System (BCS) lby the Supplier without extra cost. The Supplier shall impart ;necessary training regarding installation and use of the above softwares. The exact quantity of each type of software to be so supplied shall be intimated to the Supplier prior to/at the time of ordering subject to maximum 30 Nos./Sets. (i) Software for reading, down loading meter data, as well as configuration change activity in meter such as time setting, reactive energy for apparent energy calculations reprogramming, MD integration period changel and TOD reprogramming (changing TOD time-zones, subject to maximum 8 time zones, and / or, change of any one or more TOD time-zone timings in the meter), normally resident in the Common Meter Reading Instrument (CMRI); Software
Page 176 of 466

suitable for MSDOS 5.0 or higher version. The software shall be installed in the CMRI as well as supplied separately in the form of floppies/CDs. (ii) Configuration change activity (programming) should be enabled at BCS under multilevel password protected security system for specified/selected meter(s) identified by the meter serial number(s). Such configuration change in the meter shall be immediately preceded automatically by meter-data reading such that entire meter data prior to change is downloaded from the meter before the change is effected in the meter. Details of minimum 10 such change/s (event/s) made in the meter shall be logged in the meter memory, each with date and time-stamp, and shall be capable of downloading through CMRI and shall be available for viewing at the BCS end. The logging shall be roll-over type on first-in, first-out basis. Windows based Base Computer Software (BCS) for receiving data from CMRI and downloading instructions from base computer to CMRI. This BCS should have, amongst other requirements land features and facilities described later in this specification, the facility to convert meter reading data into user definable ASCII file format so that it may be possible for the user to integrate the same with the users billing data and process the selected data in desired manner. The necessary training, if required, and documentation for this purpose shall also be provided free of charge. The BCS should be user friendly. The data transfer should be reliable and fraud proof. The BCS should give all details pertaining to billing and load survey data. The meter condition details should also be transferred into the BCS including abnormal/anomalies of voltage current conditions or tamper conditions which can occur due too mistake in connections or intentionally done for the purpose of tamper. (a) Platform :

(iii)

(iv)

The BCS should be executable on MS WINDOWS 95/98/2000/XP or higher operating system. The BCS shall be suitable to run on IBM PC or compatible hardware platform. (b) i) ii) Meter Data Display :

The BCS should show electrical conditions existing at the time of reading the meter in tabular forms as well as in graphical format (Phase diagram). All the information about energy, maximum demand and their respective TOD register readings, billing register readings and billing history readings should be shown in a manner which user can understand quickly, preferably in tabular format.
Page 177 of 466

iii)

All the load survey data should be available in numerical as well as graphical format. It should also be possible to view this data in daily, weekly and monthly formats. The load survey graph should show values where the cursor/pointer is placed for the selected or all parameters. All the information about tamper events should be accompanied with data and time stamping along with the snap-shots (details) of the respective electrical conditions. This information should be displayed in the sequence in which it happened, in cumulative format as well as in summary format. The cumulative format should segregate a particular tamper information and summary report shall show count of tamper occurrence and the duration for which meter has remained under tamper condition. The BCS should be capable of preparing CMRI to read the meter information or for Configuration Change activity in the meter such as time-setting, Reactive Energy for Apparent Energy calculation re-programming, MD integration period change land TOD re-programming (changing TOD time-zones, subject too max. 8 time-zones, and/or, change of any one or more TOD time-zone timings in the meter). Support Display : There should be user friendly approach for viewing meter data for the reading collected now or for the reading collected in the past. All information about a particular consumer should be segregated and available at one place so that locating any consumers past data is easy. It should be possible to locate/retrieve data on the basis of one of the following particulars : i) ii) iii) iv) (d) Consumer ID/Number. Meter Sr. No. Date of meter reading. Location. The Data Transfer :

iv)

v)

( c)

It should be possible to transfer the data to and from CMRI through serial interface. (e) Configurability :

It should be possible to have selective printing out of all the available data of the meter. Print out should not include anything and everything available with the BCS. The software should support Print Wizard or similar utility whereby user can decide what to print out. The user of the software need not revert back to the supplier of the software for modifying the software just to print what he desires.
Page 178 of 466

It is very important that the BCS shall have the feature to export available data to ASCII or spreadsheet format for integrating with the DHBVNL billing system. Here again an Export Wizard or similar utility should be available whereby user can select file format (for ASCII or for spreadsheet), what data to export, the field width selection (whether 8 characters or 10 characters, to include decimal point or not, number of digits after decimal point etc.). (f) Security :

The BCS shall have multi level password for data protection and security. The first level shall allow the user to enter the system. The different software features shall be protected by different passwords. The configuration of passwords shall be user definable. The software installed on one PC shall not be copiable on to another PC. (g) Help : Exhaustive on-line Help should be available with the software so that user can use all the features of the software by just reading the Help contents. i) Necessary software for loading application programme via CMRI serial port. ii) Any other special application software of the manufacturer for the meter.

Any future up gradation made by the supplier in any of the above software shall also be provided free of cost. 13. SALIENT FEATURES : The meter shall have the following additional salient features : (i) (ii) It should be possible to check the healthiness of phase voltages by displaying all the voltages on the meter display. The meter shall have provision to be read in the absence of power through an external source as per provision of Annex G14 of IS 14697/1999 such that it should not be possible to damage the internal circuitry of the meter by applying any voltage on/through the device / port provided for powering up the meter in the absence of power supply. The bidder should explain the method adopted by them for this purpose in their offer. The meter should work accurately irrespective of phase sequence of the mains supply. It should be possible to check the correctness of connections of CT and PT to the meter with proper polarity. This shall be made available on CMRI by displaying phasor diagram. For this purpose, a suitable software for field
Page 179 of 466

(iii) (iv)

diagnosis of meter connections with the help of meter and CMRI should be supplied as per Annex G15 of IS 14697 / 1999. (v) (vi) (vii) The meter should remain powered up and functional even when either or any two phases or any one-phase alongwith neutral is available to the meter. The meter should continue to record accurately as per prevailing electrical conditions even if the neutral of potential supply gets disconnected. The meter shall be provided with adequate magnetic shielding so that any external magnetic field (AC Electro Magnet or DC Magnet as per the values specified in CBIP Technical Report No. 88, with latest amendments) applied on the meter shall not affect proper functioning and recording of energy as per error limits prescribed by CBIP. The meter should continue to function even if any spurious signals are injected on the neutral of the meter, such as D.C. signals through diodes etc. The meter reading count should increase by one digit every time the meter is read successfully through CMRI or computer or any other device and be available at BCS end as well as on meter display. The count shall not increase through CMRI operations as instantaneous parameters view and other similar CMRI operations, which do not download any data from meter memory. The meter shall be capable of detecting condition of power-off if mains supply is not present. It shall record such occurrence (Power-Off) and restoration of power (Power-On) as separate events in the meter memory with data and time stamp. Minimum 20 such events (either off or on) shall be logged in meter memory and be available for downloading through a CMRI for viewing at the BCS end. These events shall be logged in a separate compartment on roll-over, first-in, first-out basis. Electrical values snap shots shall not be required for the logging of Power off / Power on events.

(viii) (ix)

(x)

14.

DISPLAY OF MEASURED VALUES :

The measured value(s) shall be displayed on seven segments, seven digits Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or Light Emission Diode (LED) display unit/register, having minimum character height of 8 mm. The data should be stored in non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory should retain data for a period of not less than 10 years under un-powered condition. Battery backup memory will not be considered as NVM. It should be possible to easily identify the single or multiple displayed parameters through symbols/legend on the meter display itself or through display annunciator alongwith a separate legend plate fixed on the front face of the meter cover.
Page 180 of 466

The register shall be able to record and display starting from zero, for a minimum of 1500 hours, the energy corresponding to rated maximum current at reference voltage and unity power factor. The register should not roll over in between this duration. 15. METER SERIAL NUMBER : In addition to providing serial number of the meter on the display plate, the meter serial number shall also be programmed into meter memory for identification through CMRI/meter reading print out, and optionally on meter display. 16. DISPLAYSEQUENCE : The meter shall display the required parameters in two different modes as follows : A) Auto Display Mode : The following parameters hereinafter referred to as Billing Parameters (B.P.) shall be displayed in any auto-cyclic mode, in the following sequence :a) b) c) d) e) Active energy import reading (KWh) of predefined date & time for billing purpose (BP import KWh). Active energy export reading (KWh) of predefined date & time for billing purpose (BP export KWh). Apparent energy reading (KV Ah) of predefined date & time for billing purpose (BP KVAh). Maximum demand (KVA) upto predefined date & time for billing purpose (BP KVA). Average power factor of the consumption month upto predefined date & time for billing purpose (BP PF). (Note : the average power factor displayed for billing purpose should match the average power factor worked out through KWH/KV Ah). Tamper count reading of predefined date and time for the last two consumption months, or, the number lof tamper ;counts occurred during the last consumption month (BP TC). Cumulative Power-On hours reading of predefined date and time of the last two consumption months, or the Power-On hours of the last consumption month. (BP POH).

f) g)

The first parameter shall be on meter display for 5-10 seconds and thereafter, each parameter shall be on meter display for 10 seconds subject to 10% tolerance and the time between two auto-display cycles shall be maximum 120 seconds. B) Push Button Mode : The following parameters, in the sequence given below, shall be displayed on pressing the push button(s) :
Page 181 of 466

a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n)

LED/LCD segment check. Real time. Date dd,mm,yy. Meter serial number. Rising demand with elapsed time. Cumulative Meter Reading Count in accordance with CI 5.17 (ix). Cumulative Power-On hours. Cumulative MD reset count. Cumulative Active energy import (kWh). Cumulative Active energy export (kWh). Cumulative Reactive energy lag (kV Arh lag). Cumulative Reactive energy lead (KV Arh lead). Cumulative Apparent energy (KV Ah). High Resolution energies register :(Min. 4 digit after decimal) i) ii) iii) iv) KWh KV Arh lag KV Arh lead KV Ah -xx.xxxx -xx.xxxx -xx.xxxx -xx.xxxx

Note : If energy readings up to 4 decimals or more digits are provided on the main registers, then high-resolution energy registers as given at sequence (n) above will not be required separately. o) p) q) Instantaneous power factor with sign for lag/loead. Cumulative maximum demand (KVA). Instantaneous phase voltage. i) R phase voltage. ii) Y phase voltage. iii) B phase voltage. Instantaneous line currents (Amps.) i) ii) iii) s) t) u) v) w) R phase line current. Y phase line current. B phase line current.

r)

Frequency. Phase sequence of voltages (Alternatively, this may be provided at CMRI /BCS end. Instantaneous load in i) KW ii) KVA Maximum demand in KVA since last reset. Tamper data :
Page 182 of 466

i)

Present status of tamper. a) Missing potential with phase identification. b) Neutral disturbance. c) Current circuit polarity reversal with phase identification. d) Current unbalance. e) Current circuit short (bypass) & current circuit (failure) open (applicable when meter is connected in 3 phase 4 wire mode only). Date and time of last tamper occurrence with tamper identification. Date & time of last tamper restoration with tamper identification. Cumulative tamper count of all types of tampers & all phases.

ii) iii) iv)

Detailed phase-wise tamper information of missing potential and current circuit polarity reversal tamper should, however, be logged in the meter memory and be capable of downloading through the CMRI and be available for viewing at the BCS end.

x)

TOD Maximum Demand (KVA) Registers. 006:00 09:00 18:00 22:00 09:00 Hrs 18:00 Hrs 22:00 Hrs 06:00 Hrs

y)

TOD Active Energy (Cumulative KWh) Registers 006:00 09:00 18:00 22:00 09:00 Hrs 18:00 Hrs 22:00 Hrs 06:00 Hrs

Note : 1. Apparent Energy should be based on reactive Lag + Lead. _________________________________________________ i.e. Apparent = / [ Active Import Energy ]2 + [Reactive Energy (Lag+Lead)]2 Energy 2. Apparent energy calculation should be configurable for reactive energy so that either Lag + Lead or Lag only can be selected as required. This selection shall be possible at BCS end and communicated to the meter through CMRUI/computer.
Page 183 of 466

3. The TOD wise bill point active energy, apparent energy and maximum demand though not provided on meter display, should be logged in the meter memory and be capable of downloading to the BCS through the CMRI and be available for viewing at the BCS end. 17. OUT PUT DEVICE :

The meter shall have a test output accessible from the front and be capable of being monitored with suitable testing equipment. The operation indicator, if fitted, must be visible from the front. Test output device shall be provided in the form of one common LED/LCD for kWh, kV Arh and optionally kV Ah with the provision of selecting the parameter being tested. Alternatively, test output device in the form of separate LEDs/LCDs for kWH, kVArch and optionally kV Ah is also acceptable. The relation between test output and the indication on display shall comply with the marking on the name plate (imp per KWh/kV Arh/kV Ah). The resolution of the test output pulse(s) should be sufficient to enable conduction of the starting/current in less than 10 minutes and accuracy test at the lowest load with desired accuracy within 5 minutes.

18.

COMMUNICATION PORT :

The meters shall have a galvanically isolated optical communication port as per IEC 1107/ANSI/PACT so that it can be easily connected to a handheld common meter reading instrument for data transfer or subsequently hooked to a remote metering device such as modem etc. The interference between meter and CMRI shall consist of meter optical sensor terminating into a 9 pin D type male connector along with a flexible, shielded cable of 500 mm + 10 mm. Length. It shall be the responsibility of the meter manufacturer to provide such cables without extra cost along with meters to use CMRI for reading the meter. The exact quantity of this cable to be so supplied shall be intimated to the supplier at the time of placing order subject to maximum 2% of ordered quantity of meters. The bidder shall also quote separately the unit price for such cable for future requirement. 19. AUXILLARY POWER :

The auxiliary power shall be drawn from all the three phases and the meter should be able to remain powered up with availability of any two phases or any one phase and neutral. 20. MAXIMUM DEMAND(MD) REGISTRATION :

The meter shall continuously monitor and calculate the average demand in KVA during the integration period set and the maximum, out of these, shall be stored alongwith data and
Page 184 of 466

time when it occurred in the meter memory. The maximum registered value shall also be made available on meter-display. The maximum demand will be computed from the main Apparent energy register. The rising demand under the current integration period should be displayed alongwith the elapsed time. The integration period shall be set as 30 minutes, on real time basis. The principle of maximum demand calculation used by the Bidder should be explained in the offer. 21. MAXIMUM DEMAND REPORT :

Facility for auto reset of MD at pre-defined date & time shall be provided. The meter shall display the maximum demand reset count, which should increment by one digit every time the MD is reset. 22. LOAD SURVEY CAPABILITY & BILLING POINT REQUIREMENTS :

The meter shall be capable of recording half an hour KW and KVA demand, or, KWh and KV Ah energies of 30 minutes integration period for at least last 60 days. It shall be possible to select either demand or energy view at the BCS end. The load survey data should be ;available in the form of bar charts as well as in spread sheets. The BCS shall have the facility to give complete load survey data both in numeric and graphic form. The figures of 24 hours kWh import and kVAh should also be made available under each date in the load survey or, otherwise, it should be possible to calculate such figures through BCS or related software. The predefined date and time for registering the billing parameters of kWh, kVAh, PF and kVA MD as well as Tamper Count and Power-On hours readings shall be 00.00 hours of the first day of each calendar (billing) month. All billing parameters shall be transferred to billing registers and shall be displayed on auto cyclic display mode ;referred to as BILLING PARAMETERS. In case the meter is not in powered-up condition at the predefined date and time, the specified, operations should be done at the instant of the first powering-up of the meter thereafter. The above billing data, TOD registers data, load survey data, tamper information and instantaneous parameters data shall all be retrievable through the meters communication port through a common meter reading instrument ( CMRI ) and shall be transferred (downloaded ) to a PC with Windows based software to get complete details in numerical and/or graphic form.
Page 185 of 466

The necessary base computer software ( BCS ) for this purpose shall be provided by the supplier with complete details. Further, apart from instantaneous parameters like voltage, current, PF and reading of billing parameters, energy registers, TOD registers etc., the following additional parameters should be available at the BCS lend :a) b) c) d) Meter Reading Count. MD reset count. Billing Parameters for last 12 months. Billing Point (BP) Cumulative Power-On/Power-Off Hours for the last 12 months. TIME-OF-DAY (TOD) TARIFF/DEMAND :

23.

The meter should be capable of registering the time-of-day energy and maximum demand. The defined time-zones shall be as follows :006:00 09:00 18:00 22:00 09:00 Hrs 18:00 Hrs 22:00 Hrs 06:00 Hrs

The display registers for energy and demand for the above-defined four time zones as well as 00:00 to 24:00 Hrs zone shall be provided on meter display. Further the meter should have in-built capacity to define up to four more time zones through operation of CMRI, thus making a total of 8 time zones. The change of the TOD time-period(s) or defining additional TOD zones should be possible through CMRI with special authenticated command from the BCS so that only authorized person(s) can make such changes. The main control of this system alongwith proper security password/code should be available on one or more computers located at the authorized location(s) as per the directions to be given by the Purchaser. 24. HARMONICS MEASUREMENTS :

The meter shall comply with the provisions of IS : 14697/1999 and shall be capable of measuring 50 Hz energy and total energy. Meter shall indicate mechanism of 50- Hz energy measurement, sampling rate, accuracy of current measurement under the presence of harmonics. The meter should be capable of measuring fundamental energy as well total energy i.e. fundamental plus harmonics energy. Fundamental energy shall be made available on meterdisplay and the same only shall be used for billing purpose. The total energy shall be logged in the meter memory and be capable of downloading to the BCS through the CMRI and be available for viewing at the BCS end.

25.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC FEATURE :

Page 186 of 466

The meter shall be capable of performing complete self diagnostic check too monitor the circuits for any malfunctioning to ensure integrity of data memory location all the time. The meter shall have indications for unsatisfactory / nonfunctioning / malfunctioning of the following as per the requirement under Annex G 19 of IS 14697 : (a) (b) Time and date and All display segments.

The details of self unsatisfactory/non-functioning/malfunctioning of time and data should additionally be recorded in the meter memory and available for viewing at BCS end either directly or through comparison with CMRI date and time. The bidder should furnish the details of self-diagnostic capability feature. 26. TAMPER AND FRAUD PROTECTION :

The meter should have features to detect the occurrence and restoration of, at least, the following common ways of tamper and fraud : a) Missing Potential : The meter shall be capable of detecting and recording occurrences and restoration of missing potential (one phase or two phases) which can happen due to intentional /accidental disconnectio0nof potential leads, alongwith the total number of such occurrences for all phases. Absence of one or more phase voltage from mains side should not be recorded as missing potential. b) Neutral Disturbance : The meter shall be capable of detecting occurrences and restoration of injection of spurious signals through diodes etc., which affect the meter function of CT polarity reversal of one or more phases. c) CT Polarity Reversal : The meter shall be capable of detecting and recording phase wire occurrences and restoration of CT polarity reversal of one or more phases. d) CT Short (Bypass) & Current Circuit Open (Failure) : The meter shall be capable of detecting and recording occurrences and restoration of shorting (bypassing) / opening (failure) of any one or two phases of CT when the meter is connected to a 3 phase 4 wire system ./ 3 phase 3 wire system. e) Current Unbalance : The meter shall be capable of detecting and recording occurrences and restoration of current unbalance as a tamper even. Snapshots (numerical values) of voltage, current, power factor and energy (kWh) readings as well as the date and time of logging of the occurrence and restoration of all tamper events, subject to meter-memory space as described herein under, should be logged in the metermemory and available for retrieving through the meters optical port via CMRI and downloading to the BCS.

Page 187 of 466

27.

TAMPER LOGIC :

A properly designed meter tamper logic should be provided. The tamper logic should be capable of discriminating the system abnormalities from source side and load side and it should not log/record tamper due to source side abnormalities. Minimum hundred (100) events (occurrence & restoration) of all types of tamper with date and time shall be available in the meter memory on first-in, first-out basis. It shall be possible to retrieve the tamper data along with all related snap-shots data through the meters optical port with the help of a CMRI and download the same to the BCS where it shall be available for viewing. All this information shall be available in simple and easily understandable format. The threshold values for voltage, current and P. F etc. for the purpose of logging occurrence and restoration of various types of tamper shall be proposed by the bidder in their bid. However, the same shall be finalized as mutually decided by the purchaser and the supplier ;at the time of or prior to ordering. There shall be three separate compartments for logging of different types of tampers as follows : Compartment No. 1 : Minimum 40 events shall be allocated for the following current related tampers : CT polarity & current circuit polarity reversal. Current circuit short (By pass) Current circuitopen (Failure)

Compartment No. 2 : Minimum 40 events shall be allocated for missing potential and neutral disturbance tampers. Compartment No. 3 : Minimum 20 events shall be allocated for current unbalance tampers. The logging of various tampers in each compartment should be as under :

Page 188 of 466

Once one or more compartments have become full, the last tamper event pertaining to the same compartment will be entered and the earliest (first one) tamper event should disappear. Thus, in this manner each succeeding tamper event will replace the earliest recorded event, compartment wise. Events of one compartment/category should overwrite the events of their own compartment/category only. Bidders may indicate alternate proposals for the above tamper detection and logging scheme. Tamper count should increase as per occurrence (not restoration) of tamper events. The total number of tamper counts should also be provided on the meter-display as well as at the BCS end. 28. TAMPER PERSISTENCE TIME :

The persistence time for logging/ registration of an occurrence of a tamper should be 5 minutes +/- 10 seconds. The persistence time for logging of restoration of tamper should not be more than 120 seconds.

29.

ACCURACY REQUIREMENT : The accuracy of parameters measured by meters shall be tested in accordance with the relevant standards described kin clause 5.02 of this specification. For apparent energy, accuracy testing shall be done in accordance with the provisions of Annexure G-7 of IS : 14697-1999. Time accuracy of the meter should be as per Annexure G-18 of IS : 14697-1999.

30.

TYPE TEST :

The Energy meter offered shall be fully type tested at any of the test laboratories mentioned below by the bidder as per relevant standards but test reports shall not be more than three years old from the date of opening of bid. The bidder shall furnish type test reports alongwith the bid.

Sr. No. 1.

Name of Testing Laboratory. N.P.L., New Delhi.

Page 189 of 466

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

E.R.T.I. (N), New Delhi. E.R.T. L. (W), Mumbai. E.R.T.L. (E), Kolkata. E.R.T.L. (S) Thiruaanandapuram. C.P.R.I., Bangalaore.

Page 190 of 466

ANNEXURE B 11 KV OUTDOOR VCB (KIOSK TYPE) FOR CAPACITOR :

The 11 KV Outdoor VCB ;(Kiosk Type) for Capacitor shyall be provided with the following protection : i) The protection shall be provided in the form of a combined over current and earth fault relay (two over-current and one earth fault). This shall be triple pole having inverse definite minimum time (I.D.M.T.) characteristics with 3/10 time current curve i.e. the relay operating time shall be 3 second at 10 time at a T.M.S. = 1. The two outer elements of the relay shall be arranged for over-current protection and shall have a setting range of 50 200% of 5 Amp. And adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug board. The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of 20-80% of 5 Amp. Adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug board. Each of the three elements shall be fitted with shunt reinforcing unit with hand reset operation indicator. ii) For the protection of the bank against unbalancing, an inverse time Neutral (Voltage) displacement relay with settings 5.4, 7.5, 12.5 and 20 volts and suitable for 190 V A.C. operation shall be provided. The relay will be fed from the open delta connected secondary of residual voltage transformer (Discharge coil) and shall have suitable setting range to afford adequate protection to be capacitor bank against unbalancing. iii) For over voltage protection of the capacitor bank inverse time over voltage relay suitable for operation with 110 Volts A.C. supply obtainable from the secondary of 11 KV Bus P.Ts mounted on 11 KV incoming panel shall be provided. The relay shall have a setting range of 110% to 170% in steps of 10%.

Page 191 of 466

APPENDIX-1 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER KIOSK Sr.No. Description A. 1 2 3 4 5 6 a b c 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 a b 17 18 a b 19 20 21 22 I) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) CIRCIUT BREAKERS : Manufacturers Name and Collaborator (if any) Type Designation Number of poles Class Rated voltage Rated Insulation level One-minute power frequency withstand voltage. Lightning impulse withstand voltage. One-minute power frequency withstand voltage for auxiliary circuits. Rated frequency. Rated normal current Rated short circuit breaking current/capacity. Rated shsort time withsand current and its duration. Rated transient recovery voltage for terminal faults. Rated short circuit making current. Rated operating sequence (test duty cycles). First Pole to clear factor. Operating time Total break time measured from the instant of trip circuit energisation : At 10% breaking capacity (m sec). At 100% breaking capacity (m sec). Protection class of kiosk Contact travel Length of travel Rate of travel Make time Spring charging time Degree of vacuum provided in VCB Operating mechanism of circuit breaker and its associated equipment : Type of closing mechanism. Whether the circuit breaker is trip free or fixed trip and whether it is with lockout preventing closing Rated supply voltage of closing mechanism. Current required at rated supply voltage to close the circuit breaker. Rated supply voltage of series / shunt operating release. Current required at rated supply voltage for series / shunt opening release. Number and type of spare auxiliary switches/contacts
Page 192 of 466

Technical Parameters

viii) 23 i a) b) ii) iii) a) 1 2 3 4 b) 1 2 3 4 iv)

Current required at rated supply voltage by other auxiliaries. Other information : Type of breaker : Drawout / fixed. Type of isolation : (vertical/horizontal ) Type of arc control device Contacts Main contacts : Type Material Silver facing provided. Design contact pressure. Arcing contacts : Type Material Silver facing provided. Design contact pressure. Life : a) Mechanical operation. b) Electrical loperation. c) Short circuit operation. Maximum temperature rise over an ambient temp. of 50oC. Transient behavior details : a) PF recovery voltage between phases. b) Peak transient recovery voltage. c) Rate of rise of recovery voltage. Whether the breaker is restrike free. Details of Interlocks provided Operating factor for specified 50 deg. Ambient temp. & site condition, if any. Max. chopping current, Vacuum Interrupter details. a) Make & code No. of vacuum bottle. b) Pressure inside interrupter. c) Manufacturer's Code No. / reference standard. Contact wear indication. Maximum over voltage on switching transformer on No load. Thickness of sheet steel. Whether hot rolled or cold rolled. The manufacturer should give the necessary information as regards the overall dimensions of the circuit breakers and necessary details for the design of the foundation. General information regarding maintenance should also be given. 11 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS : Manufacturers Name Type Designation Highest equipment voltage.
Page 193 of 466

v) vi)

vii) viii) ix) x) xi)

xii) xiii) 24 25

(B) 1 2 3

4 5 6 I)

Number of phases. System earthing. Insulation level. One minute power frequency with stand voltage for : a) Primary winding. b) Secondary winding. Impulse with stand voltage. Frequency. Transformation ratio. Rated output. Accuracy class. Winding connection. Rated voltage factor. Type. I) Whether Resin cast or oil filled. ii) Whether Single phase or three phase. iii) Type of fuses provided. a) Primary winding. b) Secondary. c) Make. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS : Manufacturer's Name. Type designation. Rated voltage Type of insulation whether resin cast or oil filled. Insulation level : One min. PF with stand voltage for primary winding. Impulse with stand voltage. PF withstand voltage for secondary. Frequency. Transformation ratio. Rated output. Class of accuracy. Instrument security factor. Short time thermal current and its duration. Secondary winding rise at 75oC. (Max.) Knee point voltage. Maximum exciting current. RELAYS : ( 2 O/C & 1 E/F ) Manufacturer's Name. Type designation. Current coil rating. Tap range. VA burden. Highest tap. Lowest tap. Type of operation at max. time dial setting and 10 times the gap setting current.
Page 194 of 466

ii) 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

( C) 1 2 3 4 5 I) ii) iii) 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 D 1 2 3 4 5 (I) (ii) 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 (E) I 1 2 3 4 a) b) 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 1 2 3 4 5 I) ii) 6 7 8 III 1 2 3 4 5 6 IV 1 2 a) b)

Type of characteristic. Trip contract rating. Whether scal in contacts provided. Descriptive leaflet attached or not. Accuracy class of CT needed. Range of time setting. Whether draw out type. INDICATING AND INTERGRATING INSTRUMENTS : Ammeter PF meter Manufacturer's Name. Type designation/ reference. Accuracy class (es) & governing standard. The burden in VA at normal current and / or nominal voltage. Current coil rating. Potential coil Transformation ratio(s) of instrument transformer(s) for which instrument has been adjusted, if relevant. Size ( in Sq. mm) Whether suitable for sheet steel mounting. Colour finish. Short duration overload capacity Make and type of selector switch for Ammeter/ Voltmeter CONTROL SWITCHES : Manufacturer's Name. Type designation. Type of handle provided. Number of position. Number of contacts : Normally closed Normally opened. Making capacity/breaking capacity. Whether spring return to normal lor stay put type. Type of lock provided. INDICATING LAMPS : Manufacturer's Name. Type designation. Operating voltage. Size of lense. Wattage of the lamp. Colour of lamp body. SWITCH BOARD WIRING : Insulation of wiring. Size of wiring conductor for : C.T. Circuits. P.T. Circuits.
Page 195 of 466

Voltmeter

c) d) 3 4 5 6 a) I) ii) iii) iv) v) b) 7 a) b) c) F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A.C. supply circuit. Other circuits. Size of earthing bar for safety earthing. Type of terminals provided on wiring. Conductor material. Colour used : A.C. Circuit : Ist phase. 2nd phase 3rd phase Neutral. Earth D.C. Circuits. Identification of suffix used for : Metering circuit. O/C and E/F indication. AC auxiliary circuit. MEMORY TYPE STATIC HT TVM ENERGY METER : Name of manufacturer Type of meter Class lof accuracy Reference voltage Basic current Maximum continuous current Whether sealing arrangement provided on front side of meter for meter body/terminal cover/MD reset button/communication port. Programmed into meter memory for identification through CMRI Burden and watt loss of voltage circuit per phase. Push button Mode as per specification provided or not. Memory non-volatile or battery backed. Whether energy meter confirming to IS and having all the parameters required in the Appendix-I of specification. MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION : Bushing Make Type of Bushing Creapage distance Total Protected One-minute power frequency withstand voltage test for bushing. Dry Wet Impulse withstand voltage. Reference standard
Page 196 of 466

8 9 10 11 12

G 1 a) b) c) (I) (ii) d) I) ii) e) f)

g) h) 2 a) b) c) d) e) 3 a) b) c) d) 4 5 a) b) c) d) 6 a) b) c) d) 7 a) (I) (ii) (iii) b) (I) (ii) (iii) 8 a) b) c) 9 (I) (ii) 10 a) b)

Permissible safe cantilever loading on bushing. Catalogue number of bushing offered and its mechanical strength. Motor : Make Wattage Rated voltage. Protection equipment. Closing contractor Terminal Connector : Make / Material Ratede continuous current Rated Short time current for 3 sec. Maximum temperature rise of terminal connector over ambient temperature of 50 dg. C & Max. temp. attained. Paint shade of outdoor Kiosk Main bus bar. Size Material (copper only) Rated short time current for 3 seconds. Current density Interconnecting Bus Bar : Size Material (copper only) Rated short time current for 3 seconds. Current density C.T. windings : Primary : No. of turns. Cross sectional area. Material Secondary : No. of turns. Cross sectional area. Material Basic current Power cable sealing kits : Make Type Size List of interlock. Mechanical interlock. Electrical interlock. Overall dimensions : For vacuum circuit breaker kiosk complete Circuit breaker

Page 197 of 466

c)

Impact for foundation design to include dead load + impact value on opening at maximum interruptinhg rating in dead load. Constructional Features : Mass of complete circuit breaker with mechanism and vacuum bottle. Mass vacuum bottle. Numbers of breaks in series per pole. Minimum clearance in air : Between poles To earth Arrangement provided : Pole discrepancy Trip free / Fixed trip Anti pumping Connections for CTs : Size Material Connections for PTs : Size Material

11 I) ii) iii) iv) a) b) 12 a) b) c) 13 a) b) 14 a) b)

Page 198 of 466

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

SPECIFICATION NO. S-76/DD-161

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

FOR 11 KV VACUUM TYPE SWITCHGEAR PANELS WITH 11 KV CAPACITOR CONTROL PANEL FOR 33 KV SUB-STATIONS ( FOR 10 MVA ONLY)

OFFICE OF THE

Chief Engineer/PD&C., Dakshin Haryana Bijli Vitran Nigam, Vidyut Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, HISAR (Haryana).

Issue of Month : June, 2006.

Page 199 of 466

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV SWITCHGEAR PANELS VACUUM TYPE SWITCHGEAR PANELS WITH 11 KV CAPACTOR CONTROL PANEL.

SCOPE: This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturers works before despatch, supply and delivery F.O.R destination as per schedule of requirement (Annexure B) of 350 MVA , 11KV Vacuum type switchgear panels with 11 KV capacitors control panel.

STANDARDS: The Switchgear panels shall comply in all respects the requirement laid down in the latest editions of IS: 2516/ IEC-56, IS-3427, IS-3231, IS:3156 and IS-2705.

CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions: 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 Max. Temperature Min. Temperature Max. Relative humidity Min. Relative humidity Average number of rainy days per annum Average annual rainfall Average number of dust storm days per annum. Isoceraunic level Max. Wind pressure 45 195 kg/Sq.mt. Less than 1000 mts. 47.5oC -2.5oC 100 % 25 % Nearly 120 days 900mm 35

3.10 Altitude above mean sea level

TYPE & RATINGS:

Page 200 of 466

The 11 KV switchgear panels shall comprised of 11 KV Vacuum Type circuit breakers, control relay panels and instrument transformers compete in all respect etc. suitable for indoor use. The equipment shall be totally enclosed metal clad, dust and vermin proof, vertical isolation, horizontal draw out truck type construction. Each panel shall be easily extensible on either side and should be complete cable with necessary internal copper connections, small wiring,

eyes, L.T. fuses and supporting frame work with bolts to secure it to the floor. The breakers shall have the following ratings: 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Type No. of poles Nominal system voltage Highest system voltage Rated frequency 800 Vacuum type 3 11 KV 12 KV 50 Hz. Amps. for

4.6 Rated continuous current without incoming exceeding the maximum temperature as specified in IS: 2516. 4.7 4.8 4.9 Symertical breaking capacity Impulse withstand test voltage

& 400 Amp for outgoing feeders 350 MVA 75 KV (Peak) 28 KV (R.M.S.) Not less than 18.4 KA for 1 Sec. Solidly earthed.

One minute power frequency withstand test voltage

4.10 Short time current rating 4.11 System neutral

Page 201 of 466

GENERAL DESIGN OF SWITCHGEAR PANELS: 5.1 OPERATING MECHANISM : The vacuum type circuit breaker shall be trip free and the breaker control shall be supplied by 24 Volts D.C. battery. The operating mechanism shall be soleoid closing type and fitted with emergency hand trip release. All auxiliaries shall be supplied from A.C. and arrangement shall be made for automatic switch over to D.C in case of A.C supply failure. The operating mechanism shall work satisfactorily at 85% -110 % of rated supply.

5.2

INSTRUMENT PANELS: Each unit shall have its own instrument panel provided at the top &

complete with small wiring connections from relays, instrument transformers, metering instruments/instrument, switches, control switches and operating mechanism etc. wiring shall be with proper colouring code as per IS-375. The meters and relays shall be mounted in a convenient position so as to be readily accessible for inspection or repair. The terminals on the panels shall be provided with studs and lock washers and should not be of screw type. The panels shall have a degree of protection of I.P.H. 6 and it shall be earthed ;as per IS : 3427 (Latest edition thereof).

5.3

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER : The secondary voltage & current rating of the instrument transformers shall

match with the metering and protective equipment. The CTs shall have ratio & accuracy class as mentioned in the schedule of requirement. The CTs shall be wound type and suitable secondary short circuiting devices shall be provided near the CTs. . A potential transformer of ratio 11000/3 / 110/3 V shall be provided on the incoming side of each panel set and shall be star/star connected. It shall be
Page 202 of 466

provided with LT and HT plugs.

fuses and a selector switch for connection between

any two phases. Arrangement shall be made on; each instrument panel for P.T.

5.4

BUS-BARS: All the panels shall be provided with insulated copper bus-bars of 800

Amps. continuous rating and these shall be connected in a separate moisture and vermin proof sheet metal chamber. The bus-bars shall be covered with noninflammable covering instead of P.V.C. sheet. The bus bar connections and insulator support shall be mechanically strong and rigidly supported so as to withstand the stresses generated by fixing vibrations, variation in temperature and due to severe short circuits. The bus bars shall be supported on porcelain insulator at short intervals keeping adequate clearance between bus bars and earth. The bus bar chamber shall be provided with protection cover with gaskets & bus bar shutters etc. Provision shall be made for future extension of bus bar & switch board. 5.5 Relays : All relays shall be of draw out type and mounted on the front of each circuit breaker control panel in a flush pattern case. All relays shall be provided with testing facilities. If the same is not provided within the relay then a separate test block and test plugs shall be provided. The relay adjustment devices shall be easily accessible when the relays have been mounted on the panels. The relays shall be confirm to the latest edition of IS : 3231. However, the relay shall not operate at a current equal to or less than the setting, the minimum operating current shall not exceed 110% of the setting. In case the minimum operating current is around 110% then relays coils and
Page 203 of 466

C.T. shall be suitable to withstand that current continuously. The relays covers and cases shall be dust tight, moisture and vermin proof. Operation indicators shall be provided on all relays and on their immediate auxiliaries for the indication of type of fault and phase/phases involved. It shall be possible to reset the operation indicator without opening the relays contacts. All relays shall be tested at manufacturers works land test certificates got approved before despatch of material. The tenderer shall submit the descriptive and pictorial literature in quadruplicate in respect of each proposed relay alongwith the tender. All relays in the specification shall be suitable for 24 V D.C. auxiliary voltage. 5.6 CABLE BOXES : Each incoming panel shall be provided with two cable boxes suitable for receiving 3 core, 11 KV paper insulated lead/aluminium sheated, aluminium cable of size upto 630 mm Sq. and one cable box suitable for 3 core cable size upto 185 mm Sq. shall be provided in the outgoing and station transformer control panels. Each cable box shall have vertical entry from below. These cable boxes shall be complete with gland mounting clamps and filling holes.

5.7

ALARM EQUIPMETNS:-

The incoming feeder panel shall be provided with one alarm bell and alarm initiating auxiliary relay. It shall indicate automatically the tripping of any circuit breaker under fault conditions with the help of auto trip lamp and alarm It shall be complete with the indicating lamp and push button switches for Accept and reset for alarm.

5.8.1 SUPERVISION SCHEME : 11 KV switchgear panels covered by this specification shall be provided with the following indication lamps / relays:Circuit breaker open Green
Page 204 of 466

Circuit breaker close Auto trip

Red White

For monitoring of trip circuit both in open and close position of the circuit breaker, 1No. Automatic trip circuit supervision relay is proposed for the 11kV Incoming panels. In case of trip circuit faulty, the operation of this relay shall be accompanied by visual and audio annunciation. It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing the accept push button and lamp shall continue to glow till the fault has been attended to. Circuit breaker close & open lamps shall be wired so as to be on 240 VAC under normal condition .

5.8.2 D.C. FAIL ALARM SCHEME: A suitable relay for monitoring the D.C. supply to the 11 KV switchgear panel set shall be mounted on the 11 kV switchgear panel. The operation of D.C. fail scheme shall be accompanied by Visual (Indicating lamp on the switchgear panel) and Audio (ringing of buzzer) Annunciation. It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing the Accept push button while the lamp shall continue to glow till the fault has been attended to and D.C. supply restores. A D.C. Fail Test push button may be provided to test the lamp circuit of the scheme.

5.8.3 PADLOCK: Padlocks or some other arrangement of approved design shall be provided for locking the equipment in ON and OFF positions. All locks shall have two keys in addition to which a master key shall also be provided for each panel set. Approved racks or cabinets for accommodation of padlocks and keys while in use shall be provided alongwith each panel set and it shall be suitably labeled and numbered for identification.
Page 205 of 466

5.9

BUSHING INSULATORS: These shall comply with the latest issue of IS : 2099 in all respects:

5.9.1 AUXILIARY SWITCHES:

In addition to the auxiliary switches required for normal operation & control each circuit breaker shall be provided with 2 No + 2 NC spare contacts duly wired upto terminal block.

6. 6.1

PROTECTION SCHEMES: FOR INCOMMING PANELS:

Each incoming type of panel shall be provided with a single pole restricted earth fault relay suitable for 5 Amps. C.T (Secondary) with a setting range of 10% to 40% of 5 Amps. The relay shall be housed in draw out flush pattern case as well as one No. differential relay, draw out type having bias setting 15%, 30%, 45%. The back up protection shall be in the form of combined over current and earth fault relay (two over current & earth fault.) This shall be triple pole having inverse definite minimum time (I.D.M.T. ) Characteristics with a 3/10 time current curve i.e. the relay operating time shall be 3 second at 10 times the plugs seting at a T.M.S.=1. The two outer elements of the relay shall be arranged for over current protection and shall have a setting range of 50-200% of 5 Amps. and adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of plug boards. The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of 20-80% of 5 Amps. adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug board. Each of the three elements shall be fitted with shunt reinforcing unit with hand reset operation indicator.

6.2

FOR OUTGOING FEEDER PANLES : Each outgoing feeders panel shall be provided with a triple pole IDMTL

type combined over current and earth fault relay (two over current and one earth element) conforming to the technical specification stated in clause 6.1 above.

6.3

FOR 11KV CAPACITOR CONTROL PANEL:

The 11 KV capacitor control panel shall be provided with the following protection :

Page 206 of 466

i)

The protection shall be provided in the form of a combined over current

and earth fault relay (two over-current and one earth fault). This shall be triple pole haivg inverse definite minimum time(I.D.M.T) characteristics with 3/10 time current curve i.e. the relay operating time shall be 3 second at 10 time at a T.M.S.=1. The two outer elements of the relay shall be arranged for over-current protection and shall have a setting range of 50-200% of 5 Amp. and adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug board. The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of 20-80% of 5 Amp. adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug board. Each of the three elements shall be fitted with shunt reinforcing unit with hand reset operation indicator. ii) For the protection of the bank against unbalancing, an inverse time Neutral

(Voltage) displacement relay with settings 5.4,7.5,12.5 and 20 volts and suitable for 190V A.C. operation shall be provided. The relay will be fed from the open delta connected secondary of residual voltage transformer (Discharge coil) and shall have suitable setting range to afford adequate protection to the capacitor bank against unbalancing . iii) For over voltage protection of the capacitor bank inverse time over voltage

relay suitable for operation with 110 Volts A.C, supply obtainable from the secondary of 11 kV Bus P.Ts mounted on 11 kV , incoming panel shall be provided. The relay shall have a setting range of 110% to 170% in steps of 10%. iv) Under voltage relays with setting range of 50% to 90%

v) 5 Minute timer to ensure that the capacitor bank is fully discharged once it has been switched off before it can be switched on again. The circuit breaker shall be free from re-strike.

7.

FREQUENCY OF OPERATION:
Page 207 of 466

The panels are mostly to be used for feeding heavily concentrated load. As such, they may be expected to be subjected to frequency trappings on overload & earth faults. Any specific design features adopted or purposed to be provided by the tenderer in the switchgear on this account should be indicated in his tender.

8.

SPARE PARTS: A set of spares requires for 5 years of normal operation for each

switchboard of 7 panels shall be furnished alongwith the tender for consideration. In addition, item wise prices of the above spares per switchboard shall also accompany the tender.

9.

TESTS: All type and routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 2516,

IS:3156 and IS:2705 (latest edition thereof). The type test certificates shall be supplied as per IS : 2516, in quadruplicate, alongwith the tender to judge the merits of the equipment offered by the tenderer. The V.Ts and C.Ts shall be subjected to routine tests as specified in the latest version of relevant ISS in the presence of purchasers representative, if so desired by the purchaser. All test reports should be got approved from the purchaser before despatch of equipment.

10.

DRAWINGS & LITERATURE: In addition to any other drawing which the tenderer may like to furnish to

explain the merits of his proposal, following drawings shall be submitted with the tender in quadruplicate :
Page 208 of 466

i ii

Detailed dimensional outline, schematic and wiring drawings details of 11kV switchgear with control and relay panels. Front view with the positions of the circuit breaker, instruments devices and relay etc. Marked on it.

iii Elementary circuit diagrams of all control, metering and protection circuits.

iv v vi

Drawing showing height of 11 kV bus bars & arrangement of bus bars. Name plate drawings. List of fittings/Accessories. Five copies of the descriptive literature in respect of 11kV switchgear

relays, KWH meters, voltmeters, ammeters, selector switches etc. proposed to be used shall also be supplied . The successful tenderer shall submit the above drawings in quadruplicate to C.E./D&P, Vidyut Nagar, Hisar for approval. Subsequently a set of reproducibles copies of drawings in ink & 30 sets of all drawings. Shall be supplied alongwith 10 sets of erection, operation and maintenance manuals covering all readings. No material shall be supplied without getting the drawings purchaser. approved from the

11.

SPECIAL TOOLS: The tenderer shall separately quote for a set of special tools, if so required,

for erection and maintenance of the switchgear panels.

12.

GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.

These particulars shall be furnished strictly as per Annexture A in duplicate. Any deviation from this specification shall be clearly by brought out separately.

13.

PLACE OF MANUFACTURE:
Page 209 of 466

The tenderer shall state the place of manufacturer, testing and name of the manufacturer of the various items included in his tender.

14.

INSPECTION: Inspection of material and supervision of tests in accordance with the

relevant ISS as mentioned in clause 2 above and supporting drawing and schedules, and approved manufacturer specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or his duly authorised representative. The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an authorised representative of the board in respect of quality. The manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access to all reasonable time to manufacturers works to inspect and witness the tests of the equipment manufactured. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of supplier by an independent Govt. Agency. Wherever there is a dispute regarding the quality of material supplied.

15.

PACKING AND TRANSPORT: The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the material and

marking on the consignment so as to avoid any damage during the transport and storage and to ensure correct despatch to the destination.

16.

VACUUM BOTTLES: The vacuum bottles should be capable of withstanding minimum 100, Full

short circuit operations as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56. The vacuum bottles
Page 210 of 466

capable of withstanding less than 100 full short circuits would not be considered and therefore should not be offered. A Manufacturers type test reports/literature for vacuum bottles, may, therefore be supplied alongwith tender in duplicate.

17.

OPERATING MECHANISM: As clearance between contacts when vacuum breaker is in off condition is

very small so it is quite essential that operating mechanism is such that all the three poles open & close simultaneously. There should be absolutely no time difference between opening & closing of three poles.

18.

INTERLOCKING : Efficient mechanical interlocking shall be provided to meet the following

conditions:i) It shall be possible to lower/withdraw the breaker only after the circuit breaker has been opened. ii) It shall be possible to raise or lower the circuit breaker both when it is in the

fully home position as well as it is in the isolated position. iii) It shall not be possible to remove the circuit breaker until the moveable plug

unit having secondary connections has been withdrawn. iv) It shall not be possible to replace in position the moveable plug unit unless

the breaker has been racked in. v) Provision of shutters or lock off doors with locks shall be made to prevent

access to bus bar chamber and receptacles when the circuit breaker is withdrawn.
Page 211 of 466

vi)

Provision shall be made for locking the circuit breaker closing mechanism

in the open position & locks provided.

19.

MARKING: The switch gear panel have a name plate carrying the following data

indelibly marked:a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Name of the manufacturer or a mark by which he may be readily identified. Serial number of type designation making it possible to get all relevant information from the manufacturer and year of manufacture. Rated voltage Rated normal current. Rated frequency. Rupturing capacity. Operating D.C. Voltage. P.O. No. and date. Sd/Superintending Engineer/Design, for C.E./PD&C., DHBVN, Hisar.

Page 212 of 466

ANNEXURE A GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARES FOR 11 KV AWITCHGEAR PANELS. CIRCUIT BREAKERS :1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Makers name and country of manufacturer. Type. Nominal system voltage. Highest system voltage. Frequency. Normal current rating. a) At Ref. Ambient temp.as per IS:2516. b) At site conditions. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Symmetrical breaking capacity (KA and MVA). A symmetrical breaking capacity (KA). a) Symmetrical breaking current. b) Short time current rating for 1 sec. Making capacity (peak KA). 1.2/50 microsecond impulse wave withstand test voltage. One minute power frequency withstand test voltage. No. Of poles. No. Of breaks in circuit per pole. Length of break per phase. Opening time (ms). Making time (ms). Arc duration (ms).
Page 213 of 466

19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

Type and material of main contacts.

. .

Type of arcing contacts and/or arc control device. Whether the circuit breaker is trip free. Minimum clearance in vacuum. a) b) Between phases. Between live parts & earth. Trip coil voltage and power required to close the breaker.

24.

Short Circuit Type Tests : Certificate or report No. (Attach Photo Copy).

25. 26. 27. 28.

Normal /operating voltage of closing mechanism. Total weight of complete breaker. Dimensions and mounting details. Standard to which conforms. Kg.

B.
1.

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS (C.Ts)

Rated primary current.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Rated secondary current. Rated transformation ratio. V.A. output as rated current and accuracy. Class of accuracy. Rated over current factor with time in seconds. Type of CTs (Whether wound or bar type). Standard to which confirm. One minute power frequency withstand test voltages. 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand voltage.
Page 214 of 466

11.

Make of CTs.

C. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3.
4.

RELAYS : Type and make. Time setting range. Other details like No. Of Auxiliary contacts. Standard to which confirm. No. & Auxiliary contacts. D. Material. Nominal current rating Nominal Area
Shape.

BUS BAR Amp. (mm2)

E.

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

1. 2. 3 4. 5. 6 7
8.

Rated primary voltage. Rated secondary voltage. Rated Burden. Class of accuracy. Rated voltage factor & time One minute power frequency withstand test voltage. 1.2/50 Micro-sec. Impulse withstand test voltage.
Standard to which confirm.

9.

Make of P.Ts

F. 1.

PARTICULARS OF INSTRUMENTS & METERS. Type of equipment (wheather flush mounted or projected type).
Page 215 of 466

2. 3.

Guaranteed % errors at different loads. Make & size of Ammeters, voltmeters, KWH & Power factor meters.

G.

PARTICULARS OF VACUUM BOTTLES

a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j)

Name of manufacturer. Whether Imported or indigenous. Manufacturers type, normal Amps. and rupturing Capacity for vacuum bottles used on Incoming panel. ---------------do----------------------- on outgoing panels. ---------------do-------------------- on capacitor control panel. Degree of vacuum inside the vacuum interrupters. Short time rating of vacuum bottles . Number of full short circuit operations as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56, which the vacuum bottles offered can safely withstand. Whether the vacuum bottles used on incoming and outgoing panels are same or different ? Whether the operating mechanism is imported or indigenous?.

Page 216 of 466

ANNEXURE-B

SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT

7 Panel, 11kV switch boards with each switch board comprising of the following:-

1.01 1 No. Incoming panel equipped as below :1 No. Triple pole 350 MVA, 11 KV 800 Amps. Circuit breaker fitted with are control device, interlocks, auxiliary switches, isolating contacts, emergency hand trip device, mechanical ON and OFF indicator and solenoid closing mechanism operating at 24V D.C. One set of 3 phase 800 Amps. Bus bars. One set of Isolating plugs and sockets. One set of single phase cluster type isolating contacts. 1 No. Trifurcating main cable boxes located at the rear of the unit for reception of 3 core PILCDSTA cables of upto 625mm2 size and complete with wiping glands and clamps. 3 Nos. CTs of ratio 600-300/2.89-5 Amps. With first core for differential protection having a minimum knee point voltage of 40 RCT (neglecting lead resistance) and the 2nd core for REF protection having a minimum knee point voltage of 90 RCT (on 400 Amp. taps). These CTs shall confirm to accuracy class PS of ISS: 2705 part IV and shall have magnetising current as low as

Page 217 of 466

possible but in no case exceeding the value corresponding to class 5P of ISS: 2705 part III 3 Nos. CTs of 600-300/5 Amps. of 15 VA output and 5 P 10 accuracy for overcurrent and earth fault protection. 3 Nos. CTs of 600-300/5 Amps. of 15 VA output and class 1 accuracy for metering instruments. . 1 No. 3 phase star star connected bus bar type oil immersed horizontal drawout voltage transformer of ratio 11000 /3/110/3 volts and 100 VA output per phase with class 1.0 accuracy as per IS: 3156 (Part-II)-1965 complete in all respect with HT and LT fuses, isolating and sockets for HT & LT copper connectors, current limiting resistances and first filling with insulating oil. 1 No. 230V A.C. Panel space heater. 2 Set of vermins and dust proof fitments. 1 earthing set for earthing the breakers individually. 1 instrument panel mounted on top and equipped as below:1 No. Suitably sealed C.Ts operated ammeter of 5 Amps. 1 No. 3 way ON / OFF Ammeter selector switch. 1 No. 0 to 15 KV volt ammeter. 1 No. 3 way On / Off Voltmeter selector switch 1 No. Power factor meter for reading both the leading and lagging PF. 1 No. 3 elements KWH meter suitable for 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced load conditions with accuracy class 1.0. One set of tripple pole combined over current and earth fault IDMTL relay with two outer elements for over current protection with setting of 50-200% of 5 Amps. and central element for E/F protection with setting range of 20-80% of 5 Amps. mounted in horizontal draw-out type flush pattern case.
Page 218 of 466

One No. Single pole restricted E/F relay with settings of 10-40% of 5Amps. and complete with a tuned 50 c/s circuit and stabilizing resistance mounted in draw-out type flush pattern case with a provision of inter-tripping the circuit breaker. 3 No. 230Volt A.C. Indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker open, breaker closed and auto trip. 1 indicating lamp with fitting and push button switch to indicate trip healthy. Trip circuit supervision scheme and D.C fail scheme as per foregoing specification. 1 No. Breaker control switch. 1 Set of alarm equipment wired so as to be common to the complete board and comprising of alarm initiating auxiliary relay, alarm bell, indicating lamp and push button for alarm cancellation and lamp resetting.
1 No. Test terminal block for testing of instruments and relays.

1.02 4 Nos. Outgoing Feeder Panels each Comprising: 1 No. Tripple pole 400 Amps. 350 MVA 11 kV circuit breaker fitted with are control devices, interlock arrangement auxiliary switches, isolating contacts, alarm contacts, emergency hand trip device, mechanical On And Off indicator and solenoid closing mechanism operating at 24V D.C. operated. 1 Set of 3 phase 800 Amps. bus bars. 1 Set of Isolating plugs and sockets. 1 No. Trifurcating main cable box for reception of 3 core PILCDSTA cable upto 185 mm2 size and complete with wipping glands and clamps. 3 Nos. CTs of 200-100/5 Amps. of 15 VA output and 5 P 10 accuracy for over current & earth fault protection. 3 Nos. CTs of 200-100/5 Amps. of 15 VA output and class 1.0 accuracy for metering instruments.
Page 219 of 466

1 No. 230V A.C. panel space heater. 1 Set of vermin and dust proof fitments. 1 instrument panel mounted on top and equipped below:1 No. Suitably sealed CT operated Ammeter of 5 Amps. 1 No. 3 way on/off Ammeter selector/switch. 1 No. 3 elements electronic KWH meter suitable for 3 phase, 4 wire load and flush mounted with Accuracy class 1.0. 1 set of tripple pole combined O/C and E/F IDMTL relay with two outer elements for O/C protection having setting of 50-200 % of 5 amps. And central Elements for E/F protection with setting range of 20-80% of 5 amps. mounted in draw-out type flush pattern case. 3 Nos. 230 Volts A.C. indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker open, breaker closed and auto trip. 1 No. 24 V D.C. indicating lamps with fittings and push button switch to indicate trip healthy. 1 No. breaker control switch. 1 No. test terminal block for testing instruments and relays. 1.03 1 No. Station Transformer Feeder Panel : Similar to item No. 1.02 but with following CTs 3 Nos. CTs of 60-30/5 Amps. of 15 VA output and 5 P 10 accuracy for over current and earth fault protection. 3 Nos. CTs of 60-30/5 Amps. of 15 VA output and class 1.0 accuracy for metering instruments.

1.04 1 No.11kV Capacitor Control Panel : 1 No. Tripple pole 400 Amps, 350 MVA, 11 KV circuit breaker fitted with are control device, interlock arrangement, auxiliary switches, isolating contacts,
Page 220 of 466

alarm contacts, emergency hand trip device, mechanical On & Off indication and under voltage release. 1 Set of 800 Amps. bus bars. 1 Set of isolating plugs and sockets. 1 Set of single phase cluster type isolating contacts. 1 No. Trifurcating main cable box for reception of 3 core PILCDSTA CABLE upto 185 mm2 size and complete with wiping glands and clamps. 3 Nos. CTs of ratio 200-100-50/5A with 15VA output burden ,of 5P 10 accuracy for protection 1 No. 230 V A.C. Panel space heaters. 1 Set of vermin and dust proof fitment. 1 Instrument panel mounted on top and equipped as below:1 No. Suitably sealed CTs operated Ammeter of 5 Amps. 1 No. 3 way On/Off Ammeter selector switch. 3 No. 230 V A.C. indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker open, breaker closed and auto trip. 1 No. 24 V D.C. indicating lamps with fittings and push button switch to indicate trip healthy. 1 No. Breaker control switch. A) 1 Set of tripple pole combined over current & earth fault IDMT relay with two outer elements for O/C protection having setting of 50-200% of 5Amps. and central element for earth fault protection with setting range 20 to 80% of 5 Amps. mounted in draw-out type flush pattern case. B) 1 Set of inverse time Neutral (Voltage) displacement relay suitable for 192VA.C. operation, for protection of the bank against un- balancing.
Page 221 of 466

C)

1 Set of inverse time over voltage relay with setting range 110% to 170% alongwith auxiliary transformer (for external mounting ) ratio 121/115 to 127 (in steps of 1 Volt) to be used for compensating the error of over

voltage D) E)

relay.

1 No. Under voltage relay with setting range of 50% to 90%. 5 Minutes timers to ensure that the capacitor bank is fully discharged once it has been switched off before it can be switched on again.

The capacitor controlling breaker should be suitable to meet all conditions required for capacitor operation and should be suitable for controlling capacitive current upto 400 Amps. at 11KV which is equivalent to 7.5 MVAR approx. 110 V supply shall be available from existing 11000/3/110/3 Volts P.T.s.

Page 222 of 466

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Specification No. S-143/DD-177)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

11 KV AERIAL BUNCHED CABLES FOR OVERHEAD LINES (CROSSED LINKED POLYTHENE DRY GAS CURED)

Issued in Oct., 2007.

Page 223 of 466

11 KV AERIAL BUNCHED CABLES FOR OVERHEAD LINES (CROSSED LINKED POLYTHENE DRY GAS CURED) 1. SCOPE: This specification covers requirement of XLPE insulated, 11 KV Aerial Bunched Cables for overhead lines. 2. COMPOSITION OF THE CABLE The composite cable shall comprise three single core cables twisted around a bare aluminum alloy messenger wire, which will carry the weight of the cable. The cable is to be installed in open atmosphere acceptable to rain, solar radiation and other weather adversities. 3. RATED VOLTAGE The rates voltage of the cables shall be 6.35KV/11 KV and the maximum operating voltage shall be 12 KV. 4. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Unless otherwise stipulated in this Specification, the following standards shall be applicable: i) ii) iii) 5. IS:7098 (Part-II) 1985 Cross linked Polyethylene Insulated PVC Sheathed Cables. IS: 8130-1984 Conductors for Insulated cables. IS: 398 (Part-IV) 1979 Aluminum Alloy Conductors.

DETAILS OF SINGLE CORE CABLE 5.1 The cable conductors shall be of round, stranded and compacted aluminium of nominal cross sectional area 35mm2 70mm2 and 95mm2. Corresponding nominal conductor diameter and number of wires in the conductor shall be as given in clause 5.7. Conductor Screen: The conductor screen shall be of extruded semi-conducting cross-linked plothylene compound of thickness not less than 0.5mm. Insulation: The insulation shall be of extruded cross linked polyethylene (XLPE). Dry Gas cured, of nominal insulation thickness 3.6mm and its properties shall conform to IS 7098 (Part-II). Insulation Screen: The insulation screen shall comprise extruded semiconducting compound and/or semi-conducting tape. Thickness of the screen shall be not less than 0.6mm. Metallic Screen: The metallic screen shall consist of aluminium tape/sheath of thickness not less than 0.2mm.
Page 224 of 466

5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5

5.6 5.7

Outer Sheath: The outer sheath shall be black polyethylene. The nominal thickness of sheath shall be 1.8mm and it shall conform to the technical requirements of ST-3 of IEC-502. Dimensional and Electrical Data: The dimensional and electrical data for singlecore cable is given below: 35mm2 6.8/6 22 0.868 3.4 106 70mm2 10/12 25 0.443 6.7 156 95mm2 11.5/14 25 0.320 8.93 230

S. Description No. 1 Nominal conductor diameter(mm)/No.of wires in conductor 2 Approx. over dia of cable (mm) 3 Max. D.C. resistance at 20 degree C.Ohm/km 4 Max. SC current for 1 sec. kA 5 Max. Continuous load (Amps.) 6. 6.1 MESSENGER (NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR)

6.2 6.3

The bare messenger wire shall be of 70mm2/80mm2 (nominal area) aluminium alloy, generally conforming to IS:398 (Part-IV) 1979, comprising of 7 strands and shall be suitably compacted to have smooth round surface to avoid damage to the outer insulating sheath of single core phase cables twisted around the messenger. There shall be no joints in any wire of the stranded messenger conductor except those made in the base rod or wires before finally drawing. The technical characteristics of the messenger wire shall be as follows: S. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Nominal sectional area(mm2) No.of wires Nominal dia of wires/compacted conductor (approx.)mm Approx. mass Kg/Km. DC resistance at 20 degree C Ohm/Km Breaking load (KN) 70 7 3.50/10.0 184 0.493 20 Value 80 7 3.81/11.43 218.26 0.425 43.5

Note: The value in item (5) above is to be guaranteed. A tolerance of (-)5% is permissible on the value in item (6) above. 7. DESIGNATION AND PARAMETERS OF FINISHED CABLES The designation and parameters of finished cables are given in the following table:

S. Designation No.

Complete Bunched Cable Overall dia Total mass (approx.) Approx.mm Kg/Km.
Page 225 of 466

i) ii) iii)

3x35+70 3x70+70 3x95+80

53 59 62.5

1450 1900 2600

Note: The first part of the designation refers to the number and size of phase conductor and the second to the size of messenger wire. The sizes shown represent the nominal cross sectional areas in mm. 8. TESTS All the cable sizes i.e. items offered should have been fully type tested as per relevant standards at any NABL accredited/Govt. recognized Laboratory. The bidder shall furnish three sets of type test reports along with the offer. These type tests must have been conducted within last five years prior to date of Bid opening. For any change in design/type, already type tested and the design/type offered against this specification, the purchaser reserves the right to demand repetition of type tests without any extra cost. The purchaser also reserves the right to have tests carried out at his own cost by an independent agency, whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply. 8.1 The following type tests shall be carried out on the single core cables as per IS:7098 (Part-II) and Type tests certificates shall be furnished invariably with the offer. 8.1.1 Type tests: (a) Tests on conductor: i) Tensile test ii) Wrapping test iii) Resistance test. (b) Tests for thickness of insulation and sheath. (c) Physical tests for insulation: i) Tensile strength and elongation at break ii) Ageing in air oven iii) Hot test iv) Shrinkage test v) Water absorption (d) Tests for outer sheath: i) Tensile strength and elongation at break. ii) Ageing in air oven. iii) Shrinking test iv) Hot deformation v) Bleeding and blooming test. Partial discharge test Bending test Dielectric power factor test: i) As a function of voltage
Page 226 of 466

(e) (f) (g)

(h) (i) (j) (k) (l) 8.1.2

ii)As a function of temperature Insulation resistance test Heating cycle test Impulse withstand test High voltage test Flammability test Acceptance Test a) Tensile test b) Wrapping test c) Conductor resistance test d) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath e) Hot set test for insulation f) Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and sheath g) Partial discharge test h) High Voltage test i) Insulation resistance (volume receptivity) test Routine Tests: a) Conductor resistance test b) Partial Discharge test c) High Voltage test

8.1.3

8.2 The following tests shall be carried out on the bare messenger wire in accordance with IS:398 (Part-IV): Type Tests/Acceptance Tests a) Breaking Load Test (on finished wire) b) Elongation Test c) Resistance Test 9. 9.1 PACKING AND MARKING Packing Cables shall be supplied in wooden drams conforming to IS: 10418 and packed in drums suitable for vertical/horizontal transport, as the case may be and shall be suitable to withstand rough handling during transport and outer storage. The outer surface of the drum shall be painted with white aluminium pint. Similarly, the inside surface to drum shall have the protective layer of varnish/pain to protect it from white ants. The standard length of the bunched cable in each drum shall be 1 km (+/-) 10%. The wooden drums shall be reinforced with steel bends and strips for better protection. The ends of the cable shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing materials. 9.2 Marking: The cable drum shall carry the information as per the requirements of IS:7098 (Part-II) The following information may be stenciled on the drum with either water proof ink or oil paint:
Page 227 of 466

i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) 9.3 9.4

Reference of IS/IEC standards. Manufacturers name or trademark. Type of cable and voltage grade. No. of cores. Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor. Cable code. Length of cable on the drum. Suitable identification marks shall be given on the outer sheath to clearly distinguish three phases of the bunched cable. Following details of identification shall be embossed at interval of length of one meter of cable outer sheath. (a) Name of Manufacturer (b) Year of manufacturer (c) Voltage grade (d) Name of Purchaser DHBVN. INSPECTION: STAGE INSPECTION:

10. a.

The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The successful bidder shall grant free access to the purchasers representative at reasonable time, when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance, of any cables under this specification by the purchaser, shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of supplying cable in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, fit he cables are found defective. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the programme of manufacturing of cables so that arrangement can be made for inspection. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routing tests of the bought out times. b. LOT INSPECTION:

All the acceptance tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturers shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser has the right to have tests carried out at his own cost by an independent agency whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of supply. 11.0 11.1 11.2 11.3 DOCUMENTATION: The bidder shall furnish following documents along with his offer. Sectional view, showing the General constructional feature with conductor/conductor screen/insulation/armoring/inner and outer sheath etc. Drawing of cable drums with details of material dimension and paint etc. shall be submitted.
Page 228 of 466

11.4 11.5

All the required type test reports for offered items tested at any Government recognized laboratory as stated under Clause No.8.1. Literature, pamphlets for the record items. 12 The firm shall be responsible for any damage to the cables during transit due to improper and inadequate packing. Wherever necessary, proper arranement for lifting, such as lifting hooks, shall be provided. Any cable found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by the supplier, without any extra cost. 13 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list, containing the following information: Name of consignee Details of consignment Destination Total weight of consignment Handling and unpacking instruction Bill of materials, indicating contents of each package.

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) 14.

TECHNICAL AND GUARANTEED PARTICULARS: The bidder shall furnish all Guaranteed Technical Particulars, as called for, in Appendix 1 of this specification. Particulars, which are subject to guarantee, shall be clearly identified. Offer not containing these information will not be considered for acceptance.

Page 229 of 466

ANNEXURE-A SL No. 1 2 3 4 4.1 Brant Name of Trade Mark Name & address of manufacturer Rated Voltage Power Cores CONDUCTOR i ii iii iv v iv 4.2 i) ii) 4.3 i) ii) iii) 4.4 1 a b 2 a Material Flexible Class Shape of conductor Nominal cross sectional area Sq,.mm Approximate diameter of conductor Maximum DC resistance of conductor at 20oC. Material Nominal thickness Material Nominal thickness Tolerance of thickness Material Non metalic Metalic Thickness Non metalic mm mm mm Sq.mm mm Ohm/Km KV DESCRIPTION UNIT TOBE FILLED BY BIDDER

CONDUCTOR

INSULATION

INSULATION SCREENING

b Metalic(Nominal) 4.5 POLYETHYLENE SHEATH OVER CORE a Material b Thickness(Nominal) 5 MESSANGER WIRE i) Material ii) Shape of conductor iii) Nominal cross sectional area iv) No. of stands in conductor (Min.) v) Nominal Diameter of each stands (Before stranding) vi) Nominal Diameter of Conductor vii) Max. DC resistance of conductor at 20oC viii) Approximate breaking load ix) Applicable Standard Current Rating Continuous current carrying capacity of cable in air at ambient temp.40oC Amp. 7 Identification of Power Cable i) 8 Laying up of Powr Core and with AAAC Messenger conductor mm
Page 230 of 466

mm

Sq.mm No. mm mm Ohms. KN

Approximate overall diameter of cable +/- 3.0

9 10 11 12 13 14

Approximate total weight of cable Standard length of cable in each drum Tolerance on drum length Allowable Continuous Temperature of conductor Max. Conductor Temperature during Short Circuit Bending radius of the cable Testing i) Power Core ii) Messenger Conductor Acceptance Test Manufacture identification mark Whether details shall be embossed as stated under clause 1.9.4 of Technical Specification Whether type test report submitted as stated under clause 1.6.1 of Technical Specification.

Kg./Km Mtr. Mtr. oC oC

15 16 17 18 19 20

Whether drawing submitted as per clause 1.8.1 of Technical Specification OTHER DETAILS a) Phase Identification b) Non standard length c) Order Qty. tolerance d) EMBOSSING Note: These technical particulars submitted above are subject to tolerance given in the relevant specification as applicable.

Page 231 of 466

UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Specification No. CSC-XXXVI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF HEAT SHRINKABLE / PUSH ON TYPE TERMINATIONS FOR 11 KV XLPE CABLES

Issue of the Month: Jan. 2010

Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

Page 232 of 466

1.

SCOPE :This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly and testing of heat shrinkable/push on type terminations suitable for 11 KV 3-core XLPE insulated, screened, armoured, with aluminium conductor cables suitable for earthed system and confirming to IS:7098(Part-II)-1985 with latest amendment, if any.

2.

STANDARD :The performance as well as type test requirements of all type of kits referred under scope shall conform to stipulations of IS : 13573/1992 or VDE-0278 with latest amendments, if any. All the electrical & physical parameters of terminations should also conform to the corresponding parameters of XLPE cables referred under SCOPE of this specification, as per IS: 7098 (Part-II)-1985 (with latest amendments, if any) or equivalent international standards..

3.

CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. Max. ambient air temperature Min. ambient air temperature Average Max. Daily ambient temperature Max. yearly temperature weighed average 600C C -5OC 400C ambient 320C 1000 26 95 120 900 mm 195 Kg./m Sq.

Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) Avg. No. of Rainy days/year Avg. annual rainfall Maximum wind pressure

4.

REQUIREMENT :The heat shrinkable/push on type terminations offered shall be of proven design and make, which have already been extensively used ;and fully type tested.

5.

GENERAL REQUIREMENT :The purpose of this specification is to specify the performance requirements of termination kits for the use on 50 C/S 3 phase system with earthed neutral for working voltage of 11 KV. Earthing arrangement shall be as per relevant
Page 233 of 466

standard and details of earthing arrangement offered shall be submitted alongwith the tender. 5.1 The material to be used should be inert and capable of resisting degradation during the service of cable system. The kit shall be provided with protection against rodents and termite attack. Heat Shrinkable Type (Terminations) : The term heat shrinkable refers to extruded or moulded polymeric materials which are cross-linked to develop elastic memory and supplied in expanded or otherwise deformed size/shape, subsequently heating in a non-constrained state to a temperature above the shrink temperature resulting in the material recovering or shrinking to its original shape. Since the sealant or adhesives (to be used for environment sealing) between the ;heat shrinkable materials and XLPE cables shall be exposed to high electrical stresses, they must be track resistant. The heat shrinkable polymer materials being used for external leakage insulation between the high voltage of conductors and grounds should be weather resistant. All cuts/nicks inadvertently occurred to XLPE insulation must be rendered discharge free by using suitable discharge suppression compound. The heat shrinkable tubing may be either extruded or moulded type. Higher thickness of heat shrinkable sleeves shall be preferable to counter erosion due to pollution. Push on type (Terminations only) : Rubber components should be made from proven quality of tuber with tested curing properties. The semi conducting portion of the stress cone should be vulcanized with insulation so that both semi conducting and insulation portion becomes an integrated part. The stress cone must ;be of proven design of stress control. The moulding of rubber components should be aimed to achieve a smooth finish on interior and exterior of the components. The stress cone should probably be reusable type.

5.2 5.2.1

5.2.2

5.2.3

5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2

5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5

Page 234 of 466

5.3.6

In case of outdoor terminations, the suitable provision for covering the cable cores with re-useable protective system from the crotch seal to the bottom of stress cone should be made. Other Requirements : Proper stress control, stress grading and non tracking arrangement in the terminations shall be offered by means of proven methods, details of which shall be elaborated in the offer. Detailed sectional view of assemblies shall be submitted alongwith the offer. The kits offered shall provide the total environment sealing, the details of which shall be offered alongwith the offer. Provision for effective screening over each core be made and bidders shall categorically conform this aspect in their offer. The material and components not specifically stated in the specification, but which are essential for satisfactory operation of the equipments shall be included without any extra cost. The terminations shall be of better tracking resistant properties and fully reliable earthing system to maintain continuous contact with screening/armouring as the case may be. The armour earthing arrangement shall form part of the termination. Terminations shall have provision for shield connections and earthing. The kits shall be suitable for storage without deterioration at a temperature upto 50oC for more than 5 years. The fault level (as well as duration) withstand capability of terminations should be strictly matching with these parameters of cables for which the kits are intended to be used. The words DHBVN/UHBVN alongwith trade name of manufacturer, month/year of manufacturer, size etc. shall be embossed/engraved or suitably marked with indelible ink/paint for the purpose of identification. Suitable creepage extension/rain protection sheds for outdoor termination shall be provided. The adequate provisions for eliminating the chances of entrapment of air at the steps formed by semicon screen shall be made.

5.4 5.4.1

5.4.2

5.4.3 5.4.4

5.4.5

5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9

5.4.10

5.4.11 5.4.12

Page 235 of 466

5.4.13

The gripping tubing (termination boot) for the cable where trifurcation takes place, shall also be part of kit and covered under scope of this supply of this specification. Name of sub-supplier for the raw material and standard according to which their raw material are tested, must be furnished alongwith the offer. Detailed kit contents, whether manufactured by the bidder or bought from outside (with name of sub vendor) for each component must be indicated in the offer. The; terminations shall be supplied in kit forms. All insulating and sealing materials, consumable items, conductor fittings, earthing arrangements and lugs etc. shall be included in the individual kit. An instruction manual in English, indicating the complete method/procedure to be adopted for installation of kits, preferably with more and more diagrams/pictorial presentation shall be supplied with each kit. Various items quantity there of against each kit must be indicated in the instruction manual. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :The terminations shall have same electrical and thermal characteristics as those of cables with which these are intended to be used. The tenderers must furnish the guarantee technical particulars for each type/size of kit ;in Annexure-A.

5.4.14 5.4.15

5.4.16

5.4.17

6.

7.

CONSUMABLES OR RE-USABLE PUSH ON TYPE KITS :The details of consumable viz-a-viz reusable parts for each size of push on type (indoor/outdoor separately) termination must be supplied on a separate sheet. The %age of consumables for reusing these kits must be indicated for each size.

8.

DRAWINGS :Complete detailed dimensional drawings showing all details of kit contents/bill of material for each size type. Note : Any tender without complete guaranteed technical particulars and dimensional drawings shall be liable for rejection :

9.

TRAINING :In case of placement of an order against this tender enquiry, the tenderer shall have to impart free of cost demonstration to selected number of Nigam personnel by installing few kits any where in Haryana, places of Purchasers
Page 236 of 466

discretion. If required, supplier may have to give free of cost practical training regarding installation of their product in NiIgam training institutes also. 10. 10.1 TESTS :Type tests : The termination kits of offered design should have been got tested from NABL accredited laboratory as per relevant standards with latest version. 10.2 Acceptance Tests : Initially the following tests shall constitute as acceptance tests :i) Dimensional checking as per approved drawings. ii) Volume resistivity test for various components. iii) AC High voltage test after installation of terminations (as per IS : 13573/1992 or VDE-0278) on appropriate cable. iv) Dielectric strength of major components. v) D.C. High voltage test. vi) Tracking resistance. vii) Ultimatic Elongation. The scope to include more type tests as acceptance tests shall be decided after processing the offers of various bidders/after knowing the details of testing facilities for type tests available with various tenders. IMPORTANT : The tenderers must specifically mention in their offer about the details of testing facilities for various type test as per IS : 13573/1992 and or VDE-0278, available at their works, failing to do so, the offer is liable to be rejected on the presumption that adequate testing facilities are not available with them. ROUTINE TESTS :- The following tests shall constitute routine test : i) ii) iii) iv) Dielectric strength. Density. Heat shock. Shrinkage ratio.

The tenderer must specify the details of routine tests (being conducted at their works ) alongwith the standard applicable, in their offer. The routine test certificates shall be furnished alongwith the inspection call for each offered lot. 11. INSPECTION :
Page 237 of 466

The material shall be made, inspected and tested in the presence of the authorized representative of the Nigam at the manufacturers/suppliers works at the cost of the suppliers. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these tests carried out at his works, then the material should be got tested in the presence of authorized inspecting officer of Nigam from any other testing agency or from the Govt. recognized testing agency. All the expenses incurred to this effect shall be borne by the supplier. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable times to the manufacturers works to inspect and witness the tests. The purchaser have the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent agency wherever there is dispute regarding the quality of the material supplied. The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection. 12. PACKING AND TRANSPORT : The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the kits of material and marking on the consignment, so as to avoid any damage during transport and storage and to ensure correct dispatch to the destination. 13. Challenge Clause:The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed. 14. Warranty Period:The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 24 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 18 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case,
Page 238 of 466

exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the suppliers account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 18/24 months shall be one time.

Page 239 of 466

ANNEXURE-A SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR TERMINATIONS OUTDOOR / INDOOR TERMINATION KIT H.S. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. PUSH ON Manufacturers name & Address. Sr. No. & name and country of origin. Voltage grade. Type of kit offered. Applicable standards. Size. Material of tubing/moulded part/self amalgamating tape etc. Insulation time. Curing time. Time required for energisation after completion of termination. Special devices required, if any. Kit storage temperature (Degree centigrade). (a) Shelf life of kit. (b) Design life of kit. List lof contents of kit (to be furnished separately) Material used for stress control. Dielectric strength of insulation material (KV/mm). Materials used in encapsulating compound and environmental sealing. Class of kit. Whether test reports, drawings land instruction leaf lets are enclosed. Volume resistivity. i) ii) 21. i) ii) 22. Stress control tubing. Non tracking tubing. Stress control tubing. Non tracking tubing.

Relative permitivity.

Water absorption. i) Stress control tubing.

Page 240 of 466

ii) Non tracking tube. 23. Tracking resistance. i) Stress control tube. ii) Non tracking tube. 24. Tensile strength. i) Stress control tube. ii) Non tracking tube. 25. Ultimate elongation (a) (b) Stress control tube. Non tracking tube.

Note : While giving details of technical parameters under Sr. No. 20 to 25 above, the reference of applicable relevant ISS/international standard must be indicated.

Page 241 of 466

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Office of the Chief General Manager/P&D,
Vidyut Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, Hisar-125005
Tel: 01662-221285, 221830 (GM/P&D) Fax: 01662-220481

Technical Specification For

UNARMOURED COPPER CONTROL CABLES.

Chief General Manager / P&D, DHBVN, Hisar Issue of the Month:

Page 242 of 466

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR UNARMOURED COPPER CONTROL CABLES.

1.0

SCOPE: 1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacturer, stage testing, inspection and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery C.I.P. destination ( for Indian Bidders) and C.I.F. Indian Port/FOB at the discretion of the purchaser ( for foreign bidders) of Unarmoured Copper Control Cables.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify complete here in all details of the design and construction of material. However, the material shall conform in all respect to high standards of engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the bidders guarantee acceptable to the purchaser, who will interpret in a manner the meaning of drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work or material which in this judgment is not in accordance therewith. The material offered shall be complete in all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable. 2.0 STANDARDS: 2.1 Copper control cable to be supplied shall be P.V.C. insulated P.V.C. sheathed unarmoured for indoor and outdoor applications in air, in ground, in water and in concrete trenches. The control cable shall conform in all respect to the requirements of IS-1554 (part-I) 1998 and its subsequent amendments, if any at the time of placement of order. 2.2 Control cables meeting with the requirement of other authoritative Standards which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished along with the offer. 3.0 PRINCIPLE PARAMETERS (TECHNICAL). 3.1 MATERIALS: All the materials used in the manufacturer of the cables shall be of the best available quality with regards to strength, durability and shall be manufactured according to best engineering practices.

Page 243 of 466

3.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES: The insulated cores shall be provided with inner sheath unarmoured but provided with an outer sheath as specified in IS-1554 (part-I) 1988 amended up to date. The control cable offered shall be suitable for use in system up to 1100 volts. The conductors shall be composed of plain annealed high conductivity copper, which before stranding shall be approximately circular in section, smooth, uniform in quality and free from scale in-equalities spills, splits and other defects. The conductors shall conform to appropriate dimensions and resistances as per IS-1554 (part-I) 1988. 4. GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 4.1 INSULATION: The basic material employed as insulated compound shall consist of compounded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or suitable copolymers of which major constituent shall be vinyl chloride or mixture of polyvinyl chloride and suitable co-polymers which have been suitably compound and processed so as to comply with the requirements of IS-1554 (part-I) 1988. The PVC compound going into the formation of insulation shall also comply with the provisions of IS-5831-1970 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cable. The insulation shall with stand the rigors of climate and site conditions and shall not crack or retract in normal use. The colour code of the cores of control cable shall be as per clause 10.1 of ISS-1554(part-I) 1988. However the outer PVC sheath shall be black or grey. The colour coding as employed in the formation of the cable for individual cores and sheath shall be indicated in the bid. The PVC/copolymer compounds going into the formation of the outer sheathing shall afford a high degree of mechanical protection besides being oil and weather resistant. 4.2 MARKING: Every cable drum shall be clearly marked with indelible ink or with suitable weather resistant paint and shall bear the following particulars: i. Manufacturer name and trade mark, if any. ii. Purchase order no. and date. iii. Year of manufacture. iv. Nominal sectional area of conductor of the cable. v. No. of cores. vi. Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable. vii. Length of cable on the drum. viii. Gross weight of the drum. ix. Weight of tare. x. Direction of rolling the drum.
Page 244 of 466

5. TESTS: All the material offered shall be fully type tested as per relevant material standards. In case the material of the type and design offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall furnish four sets of the type tests reports along with the offer. The purchaser reserves the right to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of Purchasers representatives. Acceptance and Routine Tests: All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by the supplier in presence of Purchasers representative. 6. INSPECTION: The purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of manufacture where the copper control cables are being manufactured and the supplier shall provide purchasers representative all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the work, raw materials, manufacture of all the accessories and for conducting necessary tests as detailed herein. The successful supplier shall keep the Purchaser informed in advance of the time of starting and of the progress of manufacture of material in its various stages, so that arrangements could be made for inspection. No material shall be despatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has been satisfactorily inspected and tested. The acceptance of any quantity of the material shall in no way relieve the successful supplier of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection of such material is later found to be defective. 7. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN The supplier shall invariably furnish following information along with his offer, failing which his offer shall be liable for rejection. Information shall be separately given for individual type of material offered. Statement giving list of important raw material, names of sub suppliers for the raw material, list of standards according to which the raw material are tested. List of tests normally carried out on raw material in presence of suppliers representative. Copies of test certificates. Information and copies of test certificates as in (1) above in respect of bought out items.

Page 245 of 466

List of manufacturing facilities available. Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing exists. List of area in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections. Special features provided in the material to make it maintenance free. List of testing equipment available with the Supplier for final testing of material specified and test plant limitation, if any vis-vis Type/special acceptance and Routine tests specified in the relevant standards. These limitations shall be very clearly brought out in schedule of deviations from specified test equipments.

The successful Supplier shall within 30 days of placement of order submit following information to the purchaser. List of raw material as well as bought out accessories and the names of sub-suppliers selected from the lists furnished along with offer Type tests certificates of the raw material and bought out accessories. Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with hold points for purchasers inspection. The quality assurance plan and hold points shall be discussed between the purchaser and supplier before the QAP finalised.

The successful Supplier shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out items and for raw material at the time of routine testing of the Unarmoured Control Cables 8. PACKING AND FORWARDING: The cable shall be supplied in reels so constructed as to avoid any damage to the cable. The reels should be able in withstand rough handling during transportation and storage. Any loss on account of improper design of reels shall be borne by the supplier. The bidders shall clearly state the standard length in which the cable shall be supplied alongwith tolerance, if any, in their quotations. The cable wound on one drum shall be of continuous length and minimum length of control cable per drum shall be 500 meters. The Supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the

Page 246 of 466

appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary proper arrangement for lifting such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any materiel found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by Supplier without any extra cost. Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following information: Name of the consignee Details of consignment Designation Handling and unpacking instructions Bill of material indicating contents of each packing Total weight of consignment

The Supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of material are approved by the purchaser before despatch 9. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: The bidder shall give in his bid the guaranteed technical particulars of the cables. Any additional information considered necessary by bidder (s) with a view to high-light the technical aspects of his offer may also be supplied under this head. The bidder(s) shall clearly state the current rating factors applicable to control cables as per item 21 of GTP

Page 247 of 466

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL COPPER CONTROL CABLES

PARTICULARS

OF

UNARMOURED

(To be filled in separately for each size of the Unarmored Control cable by the supplier) 1. Name of manufacturer 2. Year of manufacture 3. No. of cores. 4. Cross-section of cores. 5. No. and diameter of wires 6. Shape of conductor 7. Material of conductor 8. Current carrying capacity. 9. Insulation thickness and material 10. Insulation resistance 11. Thickness and material of inner sheath 12. Nominal dia over inner sheath 13. Conductor resistance. 14. Colour scheme of cores 15. Thickness and material of outer sheath 16. Test voltage both A.C. and D.C. 17. Length of cable per drum 18. Net weight per drum length 19. Gross weight per drum 20. Current rating factors based on: Variation in ground temperature Variation in ambient air temperature Groups laid direct in ground in horizontal formation Groups laid direct in ground in tier formation Depth of laying in ground Group laid in covered trenches in horizontal formation

21 Standard.

Page 248 of 466

DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM

Office of the Chief General Manager/P&D,
Vidyut Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, Hisar-125005
Tel: 01662-221285, 221830 (GM/P&D) Fax: 01662-220481

Technical Specification For 9 kV Lightning Arresters (10 KA)

Chief General Manager / P&D, DHBVN, Hisar Issue of the Month:

Page 249 of 466

Technical Specification For 9 kV Lightning Arresters (10 KA) 1. Scope The specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing before dispatch at manufacturers works packing and delivery of 9 kV metal oxide surge arrestor without gap (Station type heavy duty) having non-liner resistance connected in series/parallel without any integrated series or parallel spark gap complete in all respect. Each arrester shall be complete with all necessary supporting frame work, parts, fixing bolts connectors and clamps etc. 2. Terminal Connectors: The Las shall be provided with appropriate number of solder less adaptable type terminal connectors suitable for conductor of size 0.2 to 0.4 sq. inch copper equivalent ACSR conductors. Each terminal clamp shall be suitable for both vertical and horizontal connection of the transmission line conductor. Each equipment shall further be provided with two number of grounding terminal connectors distinctly marked suitable for 25 X 6 mm size flat for grounding connections. 3. Mounting: All LAs shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures. The necessary flanges or clamps, nuts etc for the base of lightning arresters shall be supplied and these shall be galvanized. The tenderer shall supply the requisite information and data for the design of supporting pedestal structures. 4. Metal Parts: All ferrous parts of LAs shall be heavily hot dip galvanized. The bolts, nuts, screws, pins etc. used on these requirement shall be galvanized. All current carrying parts shall be non-ferrous metal or alloys and shall be designed to avoid sharp points, edges and sharp faces. 5. Completeness of Equipments: Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned in these specification Page 250 of 466 are useful or otherwise necessary but which

for the proper operation of the equipment shall be deemed to have been included in the contract. 6. Type and Installation: These surge arrestor shall be self-supporting type and suitable for outdoor installation without any protection from rain, dust and direct frays of the sun. The arrestor shall be of modern design having non-linear metal oxide resistors connected in series and / or in parallel without any integrated series or parallel spark gaps. Grading impedance in particular grading capacitors connected in parallel to one single or to a group of non-linear metal oxide arrester, stack shall be provided. The arrester shall be station class, heavy-duty type. Surge arresters shall be mounted on raised steel structures to provide adequate ground clearance. The tenderer shall supply the requisite information and data for the design of supporting structures, which will be arranged by the purchaser. Necessary connecting material such as fixing bolts, nuts, washers etc. for mounting the equipment on the supporting structure shall be included in the scope of supply. Data regarding minimum recommended phase-to-phase spacing between arresters and the clearance from grounded objects required at various heights of arrestors shall be mentioned in the tender. 7. Standards: Surge Arresters shall conform to the provision of the latest amendment of IEC document TC 37 for gapless Arresters except for the modification, which may be necessary to meet the requirement of this specification. Equipment manufactured to any to other authoritative standard ensuring an equal or better performance may also be considered for acceptance. Where the equipment offered conforms to any standard other than (latest amendment) IEC document TC-37, the salient points of the difference between the standard if proposed and IEC draft specification shall be suitably elaborated. An English copy of standard if proposed other than IS: 3070 (part-I) and IEC document TC-37 shall be submitted with the tender. 8. Pressure Relief Devices: Single phase to ground fault current 251 the 11 kV system may be assumed as Page in of 466 18.4 KA. Surge arrestor shall therefore, be fitted with efficient pressure relief

devices and suitable for relieving internal pressure and preventing explosive shattering of porcelain housing and providing path for flow of the rated fault currents in the event of arrester failure. The pressure relief device shall be of A (40 KA) as per table VI of IEC/TC-37/WG-4. The tenderer shall enclose detailed information and literature of the pressure relief device alongwith sectional view of his offer. Surge arrester without pressure relief device and arc diverting parts shall not be accepted. 9. Sealing: Each individual unit of surge arrester shall be hermetically sealed and fully protected against ingress of moisture. The hermetic steel shall be effective for the entire life of the arrestor and under the service conditions, as specified. The tenderer shall furnish sectional sectional view of the arrester showing details of sealing employed. 10. Rating: The LAs shall have the following ratings 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Rated arrester voltage (rms) Nominal discharges current Maximum discharge current with 4/10 micro see wave Maximum continuous operating voltage Maximum residual voltage for steep fronted current impulse of 10KA 9 kV (station class) 10 KA having 8/20 micro second wave shape 65 KA 7 kV (rms) 28 kV (peak)

Maximum switching surge protective level voltage at 21 kV (peak) 500 Amp Minimum thermal discharge capability Maximum residual voltage for 10 KA discharge current of 8/20 micro see wave Minimum total creep age distance of arrestor housing Impulse withstand voltage of arrester housing with 1.2/50 micro see wave Long duration
Page 252 of 466

As per clause-I 25 kV (peak) 300 mm 75 kV (peak) Class-I

12. a) b) c) d)

Temporary PF over voltage withstand capability for arrestor 0.1 sec 1 sec 10 sec 100 sec

KV (rms)

11. Impulse Withstand Voltage of the Equipment: The basic insulation level of the transformer and other equipment 11 kV side is 75 kV (peak). The transmission line and the substation are shielded by overhead grounded wire intended to protect the equipment against the direct strokes. 12. Equipment to be Protected: The LAs shall be used for protection against lightning and switching surge on Isolating switches, circuit barkers, current transformer, power transformers and other sub-station equipment. Basic insulation level of transformers and other sub-station equipment adopted on 11 kV system are 75 kV (peak). 13. General Description and Design Requirements: The surge arrestor shall be designed according to the latest technique and developments incorporating the most modern design feature such as thermally stable non-linear resistors and internal voltage grading resistors and capacitors. The characteristics of the non-linear metal oxide resistor shall be properly co-coordinated so s to ensure satisfactory operation of arrester under switching and line discharge surges. Number and rating of units per phase as well as umber and rating of non-linear resistors per units shall be clearly stated. The arrestor shall be designed to provide maximum possible protection against lightning and switches surges and shall have ample capacity to discharge repeatedly such transient voltage likely to reach the substation. It is essential the energy of these transients shall be satisfactorily dissipated and that there shall be no possibility of the arrester reflecting or reasoning the transients back on the protected equipment of line.
Page 253 of 466

The arrester shall be of single-phase construction and shall have fittings made of corrosion proof material. Special care shall be taken in the design of arrestor to avoid stresses due to large variations of temperature at site. 14. Place of Installation: The LAs would be suitable for outdoor installation without any protection from rain dust and direct rays of sun in normally polluted atmosphere. The tenderer shall state the safe distance up to which the lightning Arresters shall afford complete protection. 15. Magnitude of Earth Resistance: Earth resistance of the common substation ground mats to which the grounding leads of LAs shall be connected may be upto 2 ohms. 16. Porcelain Housing: The insulating casing of Arresters shall be made of wet process electrical porcelain free from cavities and other flaws etc and properly vitrified. The shade design shall be such as to minimize the surface contamination by natural action of wind and rain. The creepage distance shall be large enough to ensure that the resulting surface contamination under site condition do not adversely effect the arrester operation. The radio interference level shall be negligible. The withstand strength regarding power frequency and impulse voltage of the porcelain housing when the characteristics elements of the Arresters are removed shall be stated in the tender. 17. Name Plate: The Arresters shall be provided with the non-corrosive legible name plates indelibly marked with the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. UHBVN purchase order no with date Manufacturer name or trade mark Rated voltage Maximum operating continuous voltage Type Nominal discharge current Long duration discharge class
Page 254 of 466

8. 9.

Pressure relief current in KA (rms) BIL of the equipment to be protected

10. Year of manufacture 18. Material and Workmanship: All material used in manufacture of equipment shall be of the best quality obtainable of their respected kind and the whole of the work shall be of highest class, well-finished and approved design and make. Casting shall be free from blowholes, flaws cracks and other defects and shall be smooth, close grained and of true from dimension. All machined surface shall be true and smooth finished. 19. Drawing: In additional to any drawing which the tenderer may like to supply the following drawings in duplicate shall be enclosed with the tender: 1. 2. 3. 4. Drawing showing the outline of complete LAs with technical parameters. Drawing showing the sectional view of the LAs. Drawing showing the details of pressure relieving device. Drawing showing clearance from ground object and between two adjoining poles of lightning arresters, required at various heights of the LAs. 5. 6. 7. Drawing showing the mounting details. Drawing showing the details of line terminals and ground terminals. The detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing with total creepage distance etc. Descriptive literature explaining action of the LAs shall be enclosed in duplicate with the tender. 20. Inspection & Tests The equipments and material shall comply with the requirement of the type test and be subjected to acceptance/routine tests as specified in the governing standards except where otherwise agreed under this specification. All charges for the tests shall be covered in the prices quoted forth equipment and nothing extra shall be payable. The manufacturing programme shall be intimated by the contractor in advance (at least 15 days notice for Indian supplier and 30 days notice for Foreign supplier) to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing the tests.
Page 255 of 466

20.1. Type Tests: The surge arrester shall comply with the requirements of following type test as per latest amendment of IEC draft specification IEC-37/WG-4/other relevant standards. (i) (ii) Insulation withstand tests Residual voltage tests

(iii) Current Impulse withstand tests (iv) Operating duty tests (v) Pressure Relief Tests (vi) Temp. cycle test on porcelain housing (vii) Galvanizing test on exposed steel metal parts. (viii) Visual examination. The type tests reports of all the tests carried out on similar type of Arresters shall be furnished with tender in support of Guaranteed Technical Particulars. Reports of additional type tests for extra over-voltage to prove withstand capability of the surge arrester, pollution test, earth quake withstand capability test and RIV test etc. shall also be enclosed with the tender. The tenderer shall have to carry out type tests at his own cost and get these approved from the purchaser, if any such test has not been carried out on the arrester of similar design in the past or if the test report furnished for any type test is not found acceptable by the purchaser. Furthermore, the purchaser may like to get some of the type tests to be otherwise repeated. As such the charges for conducting the above mentioned additional type tests as well as the type test as per IEC-TC-37/WG-4 shall be indicated in the bid separately for each test. The type test reports should not be more than 5 years old reckoned from the date of bid opening. The type tests should be got carried out from the Govt./Govt. approved test house as per relevant ISS. 20.2. Acceptance Tests The purchaser intends to get the following acceptance tests as per IEC/TC-37/WG-4 carried out and reserves the right to witness the same without additional charges.
Page 256 of 466

(i) (ii)

Measurement of power frequency voltage at reference current. Lightning impulse residual voltage test.

(iii) Special stability thermal test. 20.3. Routine Tests: The following routine tests as per provision of latest amendments of IEC/TC-37/WG-4 covering on all completed Arrester and /or on proportionate prorated units shall be performed in the presence of purchases representatives, if so desired and no additional payments shall be admissible for carrying out routine tests and repeating these tests on the arrestor during inspecting whether at the suppliers won or their sub-conductors premises. (i) (ii) Measurement of reference voltage on units. Residual voltage test at nominal discharge current on complete Arresters.

(iii) Radio interference test (iv) Sealing test of arrestor. 21. Instruction Plate and Marking: All the nameplates, instruction plates, warning signal and any marking what-soever on the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in English Language. In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site, every parts of the equipments shall be suitably marked. 22. Guarantee: The manufacturer shall guarantee satisfactory performance of the LAs for a period of 12 months from the date of installation or 18 months from the date of receipt by the purchaser, which ever is earlier.

Page 257 of 466

Guaranteed Technical Particulars of Lightning Arresters 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Name of manufacturer Type of designation Model No. of units per phase Rated arrester voltage Max. continuous operating voltage (MCOV) Nominal discharge current with 8/20 microsecond wave a) Max. resistive component of continuous current at COV b) Max. capacitive component of continuous current at COV a) Reference current b) Reference voltage range High current impulse withstand with 4/10 wave shape Max. thermal discharge capability Long duration discharge class current Temporary power frequency withstand voltage for a) 0.1 Sec. b) 1.0 Sec. c) 10.0 Sec. d) 100.0 Sec. Max. residua voltage for 8/20 ms discharge current of a) 100 Amps. b) 5000 Amps. c) 10000 Amps. d) 20000 Amps. Max. switching impulse residual voltage at 500 Amps. Crest. Max. step current impulse residual voltage at 10 KA peak Max. RIV (Microvolt) Impulse withstand test voltage of arrester housing 1.2/50 Microsecond wave One minute power frequency withstand voltage of arrester housing dry/wet. Total creepage distance of the whole arrestor housing Weight of complete unit Height of complete unit Min. center to center recommended spacing between arresters Clearance required from grounded equipment at various heights of arrester unit Earthing arrangement provided for earthing side of arrester Mounting flange dimensional details Max. cantilever strength of arrester List of references of similar equipment already supplied.

Nos. kV (rms) KA

KA

14.

kV (peak) kV (peak) kV (peak) kV (peak)

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.

kV (rms) Mm Kg. mm mm Yes/No

Page 258 of 466

Specification No. CSC- 45 /DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010

STANDARD
TECHNICAL SPECIFCATION FOR
3PHASE4WIRECT/PTOPERATEDFULLYSTATIC AMRCOMPATIBLETRIVECTORENERGYMETERS FOR

AREARINGFENCING,SUBSTATIONFEEDERS, DISTRIBUTIONTRANSFORMERS&HTCONSUMERS Prepared for R-APDRP PROJECTS

Issue Month:

Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN

1.0 SCOPE
Design,manufacturing,testing,supplyanddeliveryofAC,3Phase,4Wire,CT/PToperatedfully Static and AMR compatible TriVector Energy Meters for measurement of different electrical parameters listed elsewhere in the document including Active Energy (KWH), Reactive Energy (KVARH),ApparentEnergy(KVAH)etc.Thedetailscopeisgivenbelow.

2.0 APPLICATION
a) b) c) d) AsBoundaryMetersforRingfencingofanArea, InSubstationonincoming/OutgoingHTfeeders, OnDistributionTransformers HTConsumers

3.0

STANDARDS TO WHICH METERS SHALL COMPLY

Guidelines on Data Exchange for Electricity Meter Reading, Tariff and Load Control Companion Specification enclosed with this document as annexure. IS: 14697 /1999 (reaffirmed 2004) Specification for AC Static Transformer operated Watt Hour & VAR-Hour meters (class 0.5S); IS-15707 Specification for Testing, evaluation, installation & maintenance of AC Electricity Meters-Code of Practice The equipment meeting with the requirements of 466 of other authoritative standards, which Page 259 ensure equal or better quality than the standard mentioned above, also shall be considered; in case of conflict related with communication protocol, the Guidelines on Data Exchange for Electricity Meter Reading, Tariff and Load Control Companion Specification enclosed with this document as annexure shall prevail upon. For conflict

related with other parts of the specification, the order of priority shall be i) This technical specification ii) IS: 14697 /1999 (reaffirmed 2004). 4.0 GENERALTECHNICALREQUIREMENTS 1
TYPE

2 3 4

FREQUENCY ACCURACY CLASS SECONDARY VOLTAGE

AMR Compatible Static, 3 Ph, 4 Wire Tri-Vector Energy Meter (Export/Import type for Boundary/ring fencing/interface meters) 50 Hz 5% 0.5S 1.For CT/PT operated HT meters-Suitable for operation from 110V Ph-Ph or 63.5V Ph-N 2.For distribution transformer and other LTCT operated Meters- Suitable for operation from 415V Ph-Ph or 240 V Ph-N -/1 Amps or -/5 Amps. as per existing CT for -feeders 2.0 Ib; Starting and Short time current shall be as per IS14697
i) The active and apparent power consumption, in each voltage circuit, at reference voltage, reference temperature and referencefrequencyshallnotexceed1.5Wand8VA. ii) The apparent power taken by each current circuit, at basic current, reference frequency and reference temperature shall notexceed1.0VA

5 6 7

BASIC CURRENT (Ib) MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS CURRENT POWER CONSUMPTION

8 9

POWER FACTOR DESIGN

0.0 Lag -Unity- 0.0 Lead

Meter shall be designed with application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or micro controller; shall have no moving part; electronic components shall be assembled on printed circuit board using surface mounting technology; factory calibration usinghighaccuracy(0.05class)softwarebasedtestbench.

5.0 CONSTRUCTIONALREQUIREMENT/METERCOVER&SEALINGARRANGEMENT The utilities may add their specific sealing requirements and meter COVER constructions required. Wherever poly carbonate cover is specified, it shall conform to IS 11731 (FH1category) besides meeting the test requirement of heat deflection test as per ISO 75, glow wire test as per the IS:11000 (part 2/SEC-1) 1984 OR IEC PUB,60695-2-12, Ball pressure test as per IEC--60695-10-2 and Flammability Test As per UL 94 or As per IS 11731(Part-2) 1986 6.0 WORKINGENVIRONMENT
As per IS 146971999 (reaffirmed 2004). Meter to perform satisfactorily under NonAir Conditionedenvironment(withinstipulationsofIS) MeterbodywillconformtoIP51degreeofprotection.Foroutdoorusemetershallbeinstalledin Page 260 of 466 sealedenclosureconformingtoIP55. The meter shall be suitable designed for satisfactory operation under the hot and hazardous tropicalclimateconditionsandshallbedustandverminproof.Allthepartsandsurface,which

are subject to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided with such protective finish, which provided suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessivehumidity.

7.0 MANUFACTURINGPROCESS,ASSEMBLYANDTESTING
Meters shall be manufactured using latest and state of the art technology and methods prevalent in electronics industry. The meter shall be made from high accuracy and reliable surface mount technology (SMT) components. All inward flow of major components and sub assemblyparts(CT,PT,RTCs/Crystal,LCDs,LEDs,powercircuitelectroniccomponentsetc.)shall havebatchandsourceidentification.MultilayerPCBassemblywithPTH(PlatedthroughHole) usingsurfacemountedcomponentshallhaveadequatetrackclearanceforpowercircuits.SMT component shall be assembled using automatic pickandplace machines, Reflow Soldering oven,forstabilizedsettingofthecomponentsonPCB.ForsolderedPCBs,cleaningandwashing ofcards,afterwavesolderingprocessistobecarriedoutasastandardpractice.Assemblylineof the manufacturing system shall have provision for testing of subassembled cards. Manual placing of components and soldering, to be minimized to items, which cannot be handled by automatic machine. Handling of PCB with ICs/CMOS components, to be restricted to bare minimum and precautions to prevent ESD failure to be provided. Complete assembled and solderedPCBshouldundergofunctionaltestingusingcomputerizedAutomaticTestEquipment. Fullyassembledandfinishedmetershallundergoburnintestprocessfor12hrsat55degree Celsius (Max. temperature not to exceed 60 degree Celsius) under base current (Ib) load condition. Test points should be provided to check the performance of each block/stage of the meter circuitry.RTCshallbesynchronizedwithNPLtimeatthetimeofmanufacture.Meterstestingat intermediate and final stage shall be carried out with testing instruments, duly calibrated with referencestandard,withtraceabilityofsourceanddate.

8.0 DISPLAYS The meter shall have 7 digits (with indication), parameter identifier, backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of minimum 10 mm height, wide viewing angle. Auto display cycling push button required with persistence time of 10 Seconds. LCD shall be suitable for temperature withstand of 70 deg C; Sequence of display of various instantaneous electrical parameters shall be as desired by Purchaser at the time of order. The data stored in the meters shall not be lost in the event of power failure. The meter shall have Non Volatile Memory (NVM), which does not need any battery backup. The NVM shall have a minimum retention period of 10 years. 9.0 PERFORMANCEUNDERINFLUENCEQUANTITIES
The meters performance under influence quantities shall be governed by IS 146971999 (reaffirmed2004).Theaccuracyofmetershallnotexceedthepermissiblelimitsofaccuracyas perstandardIS:14697(latestversion).

10.0 OUTPUTDEVICE Energy Meter shall have test output, accessible from the front, and be capable of being monitored with suitable testing equipment while in operation at site. The operation indicator must be visible from the front and test output device shall be provided in the Page 261 of 466 form of LED. Resolution of the test output device shall be sufficient to enable the starting current test in less than 10 minutes. 11.0 REALTIMEINTERNALCLOCK(RTC)

RTC shall be pre-programmed for 30 Years Day/date without any necessity for correction. The maximum drift shall not exceed +/- 300 Seconds per year. The clock day/date setting and synchronization shall only be possible through password/Key code command from one of the following:
a) HandHeldUnit(HHU)orMetertestingworkbenchandthisshallneedpasswordenabling formeter; b) FromremoteserverthroughsuitablecommunicationnetworkorSubstationdatalogger PC.

12.0 QUANTITIESTOBEMEASURED&DISPLAYED The meter shall be capable of measuring and displaying the following electrical quantities within specified accuracy limits for polyphase balanced or unbalanced loads: a) Instantaneous Parameters such as phase and line voltages, currents, power factors, overall kVA, kW, kVAr, power factor, frequency etc as per details given in the table below and enclosed annexure. b) Block Load Profile Parameters such as kVAh/kWh/kVArh (lag/lead)/Maximum Demand (MD) in kW/kVA/power factor/phase and line voltages/currents etc (minimum 5 parameters) as per details given in the table below and enclosed annexure. c) Daily Load Profile Parameters such as cumulative energy kWh (import/export)/cumulative kVAh (while kW- import/export)/cumulative energy kVArh (quadrant-1/2/3/4)/reactive energy high (V>103%)/low (V<97%), etc as per details given in the table below and enclosed annexure. In addition to above the meter shall also record the Name plate details, programmable parameters (readable as profile), occurrence and restoration of tamper events along with the parameters (Table A5.1, A5.2 and A6.1 to A6.8 respectively of enclosed guideline document)
Detailofcategorywiseparametersrequirementsuitableforspecificlocationsuchasfeeder/DT metering, interface points/boundary points is given in following tables of guidelines document enclosedasannexure: Category Parametergroup AnnexureTableNo. SubstationFeeder/Distribution A2.1 Instantaneous parameters Transformermeter A2.2 Block Load Profile Boundary/Ringfencing/Interface Meters

HTConsumerMeters

SubstationFeeder/Distribution Transformer/Boundary/Ring fencing/Interface/HTConsumer Meters Loggingparametersforeachofthe eventconditionshallbeselected

parameters Instantaneous parameters Block Load Profile parameters Daily Load Profile parameters Instantaneous parameters Block Load Profile parameters Billing Profile parameters Name Plate details Programmable Parameters Event Conditions
Page 262 Capture of 466 parameters for event as applicable (Event Log Profile)

A3.1 A3.2 A3.3 A4.1 A4.2 A4.3 A5.1 A5.2 A6.1toA6.7 A6.8

 13.0 DEMANDINTEGRATIONPERIOD The maximum demand integration period may be set at 15 minute or 30 minute by purchaser as per requirement. 14.0 MDRESET It should be possible to reset MD by the following options: a) Communication driven reset b) Local push button c) Auto reset at 24:00 hrs at the end of each billing cycle 15.0 MARKINGOFMETERS The marking of meters shall be in accordance with IS: 14697 /1999 (reaffirmed 2004). The meters shall bear marking Purchased under R-APDRP scheme. The meter shall also store name plate details as given in the table A5.1 of annexure. These shall be readable as a profile as and when required. 16.0 COMMUNICATIONCAPABILITY The meter shall be provided with two ports for communication of the measured/collected data as per guideline document enclosed in the annexure, i.e. a hardware port compatible with RS 232 or RS 485 specifications which shall be used for remote access through suitable Modem (GPRS/GSM/EDGE/CDMA/PSTN/LPR) and an Optical port complying with hardware specifications detailed in IEC-62056-21. This shall be used for local data downloading through a DLMS compliant HHU. The RS 485 port shall be used at Substations suitable for multi-drop connections of the meter for exporting data to sub-station data logger/DCU/Computer and the remote end server. The RS 232 port shall be used at boundary points meters and Distribution Transformer meters capable to transfer and export data to the remote end server through suitable communication mediums (GPRS/GSM/EDGE/CDMA/ PSTN/LPR). Both ports shall support the default and minimum baud rate of 9600 bps. 17.0 HANDHELDUNIT(HHU) To enable local reading of meters data a DLMS compliant HHU shall be used. The HHU shall be as per specification given in the enclosed guidelines document. It shall be compatible to the DLMS compliant energy meters that are to be procured/supplied on the basis of this specification. The HHU shall be supplied by the meter manufacturer along with the meter. Numbers of HHU to be procured shall be decided by the purchaser. 18.0 TAMPER&FRAUDMONITORINGFEATURES The meter shall work satisfactorily under presence of various influencing conditions like External Magnetic Field, Electromagnetic Field, Radio Frequency Interference, harmonic Distortion, Voltage/Frequency Fluctuations, and466 electromagnetic High Frequency Fields Page 263 of etc. The meter shall be immune to abnormal voltage/frequency generating devices and shall record the occurrence and restoration of such tamper events along with parameters such as current, voltages, kWh, power factor, event code, date & time etc. (listed in Table A6.1 to A6.7 in enclosed document).

Tamper details shall be stored in internal memory for retrieval by authorized personnel through either of the following: i) HHU. ii) Remote access through suitable communication network. Minimum 200 numbers of events (occurrences & restoration with date & time) should be available in the meter memory. 19.0 TYPETESTS The meter offered should have successfully passed all type tests described in the IS 14697 and the meter Data Transfer and Communication capability as per enclosed guidelines document. Type test certificate shall be submitted along with the offer and the same shall not be more than 36 months old at the time of bid submission. Make & type of major components used in the type-tested meter shall be indicated in the QAP. The condition are to be relaxed by the purchasers (utilities) for the bids to be issued in next six months (i.e. upto Feb 2010) to accommodate design, development and testing of the new standard meters, conforming to the guidelines document enclosed as annexure, by manufacturers. The bidder shall have to submit the required type test certificate (as per bid requirement) to the purchaser (utility) at the time of meters delivery.
Further Purchaser shall reserve the right to pick up energy meters at random from the lots offered and get the meter tested at third party lab i.e. CPRI / agencies listed at AppendixC of LateststandardizationofACstaticelectricalenergymetersCBIPpublicationNO.304/NPL/ CQAL/ERTL/ERDAatthesolediscretionofthePurchaser.Thesupplierhasnorighttocontest the test results of the third party lab or for additional test and has to replace/take corrective actionatthecostofthesupplier.

It shall be the responsibility of the supplier to arrange such tests and Purchaser shall be informed of the date and time of conduction of tests well in advance to enable him to witness such tests. Test charges of the testing authority, for such successful repeat type tests, shall be reimbursed at actual by the Purchaser. 20.0 ACCEPTANCE&ROUTINETESTS
CriteriaforselectionforsuchtestsandperformancerequirementsshallbeasperIS146971999 (reaffirmed2004)

Additional acceptance shall include Surge withstand (SWC) for 6 kV p as per IEC 6205211, Lightning impulse test and HF disturbance test as per IS 14697. One sample meter per order from one of the offered lot shall be subjected to these specific tests. Meters subjected to these tests shall not be used after tests. Accuracy tests shall be performed at the beginning and at the end of the acceptance tests specified.

21.0 QUALITYASSURANCE: The manufacturer shall have a comprehensive quality assurance program at all stages of manufacture for ensuring products giving reliable, trouble free performance. Details of the bidders quality assurance and test set up shall be furnished with the bid. A detailed quality assurance program shall be finalized with the successful bidder during the award Page 264 of 466 stage. Bidder shall furnish following information along with his bid: i) Organization structure of the manufacturer and his main sub-suppliers (PCBs, SMT cards, CT/PT) with details of QA setup, overall workflow;

ii)

Copy of system manual showing QAP (Quality Assurance Plan) as actually practiced during manufacturing and final testing. iii) List of raw materials and critical components (ASIC chip, crystal clock, memory register Chip, transformers, optical ports etc.) with their suppliers; iv) Stage inspection of product before final testing; v) Procedure adopted for In-situ testing of PCBs, after placement of surface mounted component, for quantitative parametric variation of tolerance by self or subcontractor. vi) Testing and calibration facility, date of calibration of test bench, manpower data of bench operators; vii) Sample copies of test certificate of bought out components. viii) The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection. 22.0 QUALIFYINGREQUIREMENTS i) ii) Bidder should be a manufacturer; He should have all the facility in his works for design, assembly, quality assurance, burn-in test (Fully assembled Energy Meter), testing (all routine and acceptance tests), automatic calibration of Energy Meter on software based test bench, qualified team of technical and software engineers; The average annual turnover of the manufacturer for Energy meters for the three (3) best financial years out of last five (5) years, should be at least Rs.** Lakhs. (** is 2 x Package Cost x 12/ Work completion schedule in Months) Notwithstanding anything stated herein under, the Purchaser reserves the right to assess the capacity and capability of the bidder to execute the work, should the circumstances warrant such assessment in the overall interest of the Purchaser.

iii)

iv)

23.0 GUARANTEE The meter shall have a designed life of at least 10 years and the supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance - cost to the Nigam, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which, under normal and proper use, proves defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material by the consignee or 72 months from the date of installation, which ever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of the Nigam, actually using the material, will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier as well as the Purchasing Authority and the Controller of Stores. The replacement shall be affected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall also arrange to remove the defective supply within reasonable period but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of the notice in respect thereof. Upon the firm failing to do so, the damages / defects may be got rectified by the Nigam and the cost adjusted from the firms pending dues and/or security deposit against this or any other contract in force and the balance left be got deposited by the supplier. The Nigam may withhold the amount, equal to cost of defective material. These provisions shall, also equally apply to the replaced material. In case, Page 265 of within warranty period, it shall, also, the material is again found to be defective 466 have to be replaced similarly. The purchaser shall recover an equivalent amount plus 15% supervision charges, if the defective material is not repaired / replaced with in the above specified period.

 24.0 FIXING&CONNECTIONARRANGEMENT Manufacturer shall ensure following technical points: i) Meter shall be suitable for mounting on Simplex type vertical panel with front door; CAT-M4 disconnecting type TBs to be used for Current circuit; Panel wiring to be properly dressed and harnessed; External cables to enter panel from bottom gland plate using double compression glands. ii) Meter installation & Inter-connection from existing CT/PT connections to energy meters in the panel shall be in the scope of contractor/bidder. The external cabling from existing CT/PT to Energy Meter panel shall be in the scope of purchaser. iii) Energy Meter terminals block shall be adequately sized with regard to maximum conductor dimension, commensurate with current rating of Energy Meter. 25.0CHALLENGECLAUSE: The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for loses or any other parameters from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam and the results if found deviating/unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within 30 days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed. ApplicationGuideforusersofthisspecification 1. The specification does not contain constructional details and methods of sealing of the meter COVER and the terminal sizes required for the Purchasers incomer cables. These may be added suitably as per the requirements of individual users. Quantities of meters required with / without meter COVER needs to be specified in the Bill of Quantities in the NIT specifications. 2. The NIT specification shall suitably incorporate the appropriate Qualifying Requirements considering the quantity of meters intended to be procured.

Page 266 of 466

SECTION VII-D

DRAWINGS

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

267

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

268

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

269

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

270

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

271

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

272

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

273

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

274

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

275

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

276

BID VOLUME -II Sec VII-TED-131

277